<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Cttxg</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Cttxg"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/Special:Contributions/Cttxg"/>
	<updated>2026-05-08T12:21:04Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Building_Quiz&amp;diff=122211</id>
		<title>Building Quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Building_Quiz&amp;diff=122211"/>
		<updated>2016-02-09T07:22:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How a Moodle quiz works==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you&#039;re new to quiz creation, try the [[Quiz quick guide]] first.}}&lt;br /&gt;
Once a quiz has been added to the course and the [[Quiz settings]] established,the teacher can start to build the quiz.  The teacher can access the quiz to edit the questions by clicking directly on the Quiz name on the course home page or by clicking &amp;quot;Edit quiz&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration.&#039;&#039;  (You can also make questions in the [[Question bank]] without first creating a quiz. These questions may then be used later.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:editquiz.png|thumb|400px|Accessing the quiz to add or edit questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have accessed the quiz editing screen as above, you can add questions from a number of locations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Add&#039; link as in the screenshot below. (&#039;&#039;Note that in the US, the term &#039;marks&#039; is replaced by &#039;points&#039;.&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
#When it opens up, choose either to add a new question, to select a question from the question bank or to add a random question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:newaddquestion.png|thumb|450px|Adding a question]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating a new question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To make a brand new question, click &#039;Add&#039; and then &#039;+ a new question&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. From the next screen, choose the question type you want to add and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; (&#039;When you click on a question type on the left, helpful information appears on the right&#039;&#039;. )&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:questionpicker.png|thumb|440px|Selecting a question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Fill in the question form, making sure to give a grade to the correct answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Click &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:newlycreatedquestion.png|thumb|430px|A question when it has been created]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Note| If you have a very complex question, and you want to check it as you go along, you can preview it and then click &amp;quot;Save changes and continue editing&amp;quot;.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a question has been created, an icon and words display its type (eg multiple choice). It can be modified by clicking the edit icon (eg [[File:editicon.png]]) and previewed or deleted by clicking the magnifying glass or X icons:(eg  [[File:previewdelete1.png]])&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding responses and feedback====&lt;br /&gt;
5. When you add responses and feedback, remember you can expand the toolbar to show more buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. You can continue adding questions this way, clicking &#039;Add&#039; and &#039;+ a new question&#039; each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing a pre-made question===&lt;br /&gt;
*If other teachers in the course have made questions, or if a teacher made questions in an earlier quiz, these can be added to the current quiz by clicking &#039;Add&#039; and &#039;+ from question bank&#039; .&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the + sign next to one question you want to add it (1 in screenshot below)&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have several questions, or you want to add all the questions, tick the box of each question or the top box (2 in screenshot below) and then click &#039;Add selected questions to the quiz&#039; (3 in the screenshot below).&lt;br /&gt;
* To sort the questions, click the column headings. The default sort order (T) is short for question type. (2 in the screenshot below)&lt;br /&gt;
* To ensure all previously made questions are available, make sure to tick the boxes &amp;quot;also show questions from sub-categories/old questions&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:addfromqbank1.png|thumb|350px|Using a previously made question]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; It is also possible to import pre-made questions into your quiz, from &#039;&#039;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Question bank&amp;gt;Import.&#039;&#039; See [[Import questions]] for more information. Sample questions are available from the [http://moodle.net/mod/data/view.php?d=1&amp;amp;mode=list&amp;amp;perpage=40&amp;amp;search=&amp;amp;sort=0&amp;amp;order=DESC&amp;amp;advanced=0&amp;amp;filter=1&amp;amp;advanced=1&amp;amp;f_2=Quiz+questions&amp;amp;f_11=&amp;amp;f_13=&amp;amp;f_12=&amp;amp;f_9=&amp;amp;f_8= Moodle.net content database.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a random question===&lt;br /&gt;
As long as you have questions in the question bank, you can add random questions to your quiz by clicking &#039;Add&#039; and then &#039;+ a random question&#039;.  This might be useful if you have students in a class taking a quiz at the same time, because they are unlikely to get the same questions at the same time. The same question will never appear twice in a quiz. If you include several random questions then different questions will always be chosen for each of them. If you mix random questions with non-random questions then the random questions will be chosen so that they do not duplicate one of the non-random questions. This does imply that you need to provide enough questions in the category from which the random questions are chosen, otherwise the student will be shown a friendly error message. The more questions you provide the more likely it will be that students get different questions on each attempt. When a quiz with random questions is retaken, the random questions will be different from the ones in previous attempts. For a discussion on the behaviour of random questions, see MDL-6340&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grade for the randomly chosen question will be rescaled so that the maximum grade is what you have chosen as the grade for the random question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add one or more random questions by choosing the number and category in the question bank. Note the die icon to highlight random question selection.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:addrandomq.png|thumb|400px|Adding a random question]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:newrandom.png|thumb|400px|Random question selected for quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Quiz question tags====&lt;br /&gt;
Note that although it is possible to tag questions, the feature does not currently work. See forum discussion: https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=194119&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question categories===&lt;br /&gt;
Questions can be stored and retrieved from categories in the Question bank. When you make a new question it defaults to the category with the course name. So if you make a quiz in the Senior Physics course, questions will automatically be added to &amp;quot;Default for Senior Physics&amp;quot;. You can opt to have your quiz questions in a category of their own (&amp;quot;Quizname&amp;quot;) or to add a subcategory.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To add a subcategory, go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Question bank&amp;gt;Categories&#039;&#039; For more information on question contexts and categories, see [[Question bank]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will have access to different categories according to their permissions. For example, a regular teacher might only have access to question categories in his own Physics course whereas his Faculty Head of Science with permissions in all science courses might have access to question categories in Biology and Chemistry as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz layout==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can choose in  &#039;&#039; Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Edit settings&amp;gt;Layout&#039;&#039; whether to have a new page for every question or after a certain number of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add a page break between questions by clicking the arrow icon (where the arrows are pointing away from each other) (1 in the screenshot below) A new page will be created. (2 in the screenshot below)&lt;br /&gt;
*You can remove pages by clicking the arrow icon (where the arrows are pointing towards each other). (3 in the screenshot below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:addpagebreak.png|thumb|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also change the layout of the whole quiz by clicking the &#039;Repaginate&#039; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repaginate.png|thumb|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Questions may be moved by dragging and dropping using the crosshairs icon: [[File:crosshairsicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Section headings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Section headings may be added to each new page.&lt;br /&gt;
*For the first page, click the &#039;pencil&#039; icon at the top (1) and add your heading (2):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sectionheading1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*For other pages, click the &#039;Add&#039; link (1) and choose &#039;a new section heading&#039; (2), and then add your heading as for Page 1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sectionheading2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The section headings are displayed in the Quiz navigation block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quiznavsectionheadings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Randomising the order questions appear===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The order in which questions appear to the student may be randomised or &#039;shuffled&#039; by ticking the &#039;Shuffle&#039; box at the top of the screen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:shuffle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Where questions are in different sections (see &#039;&#039;Section headings&#039;&#039; above), each section has its own &#039;Shuffle&#039; box to tick. This means that you can mix up questions on one section, but in another section, where their order is important, you can keep them in the order you need them to display:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:shuffle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Making questions conditional upon other questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If using the &#039;&#039;Interactive with multiple tries&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Immediate Feedback&#039;&#039; behaviour and with the navigation method set to  &#039;Free&#039;, it is possible to make the display of a question dependent on a previous question being answered first.&lt;br /&gt;
*The question editing page will display padlock icons to the right of each question:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:locks1.png|thumb|center|400px|Padlocks - all unlocked]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you want to make a question, for example Q2, conditional upon answering Q1, then click the padlock just above Q2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lock2.png|thumb|center|400px|Padlocks  - Q2 locked]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When a student accesses the quiz, they will see a message that Q2 is not available until they give a response to Q1:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lock3.png|thumb|center|550px|What students see]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz navigation block, Q2 will be greyed out:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:locksnav.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In the following example, note that, Q1 follows a description, and a description &#039;questions&#039; cannot be finished. Therefore, Q1 cannot depend on the previous question. Similarly, Q4 follows an Essay question. The Essay cannot be finished during the attempt, so the following question cannot depend on it. Note the lack of padlocks in the following screenshot because of the description and Essay question:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:conditionalquestionpadlocks.png|thumb|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning points to questions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Quiz administration &amp;gt; Edit quiz &amp;gt; Editing quiz&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set how many points each question is worth by changing the number in the box to the right of each question and you can change the maximum grade by changing the number in the box top right at the top of the quiz. The default is one point per question and 100.00 maximum grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:allquizgrades.png|thumb|450px|Points per question and max grade]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:editmaxmark.png|thumb|450px|Edit individual marks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz module will do any maths, so for example, a 2 point question will be  worth 2 times more when the Quiz module determines how many point out of 10 to award the student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Previewing the quiz==&lt;br /&gt;
*You can preview individual questions by clicking the magnifying glass icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can preview the whole quiz by clicking the &amp;quot;Preview&amp;quot; link in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Preview&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*The quiz works like a real quiz so you can see your grades and any feedback for correct/incorrect answers just as a student would see them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: &#039;&#039;To get a more accurate view of how a student would view your quiz, it is advised to log in with a  &amp;quot;dummy&amp;quot; student account created by the admin for testing activities. This is more reliable than the &#039;switch role to student&#039; feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*See also the question: &#039;How can a teacher &#039;-dry run a quiz..?&#039;   in [[Quiz FAQ]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:singleqp.png|thumb|300px|Previewing a single question]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:previewquiz.png|thumb|200px|Click to preview the whole quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:quizpreviewed.png|thumb|200px|Quiz in preview mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==After quiz has been attempted==&lt;br /&gt;
If one or more students have taken the quiz, you will see a list of all the questions in the quiz and a notice saying that you cannot add or remove questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the order of questions, regrade them, preview an individual question and click on an question edit link that will allow you to directly edit the question stored in the question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note| You can delete all quiz attempts by students and then edit the quiz as if no students had attempted it.  To do this,click the quiz name and then the Results link in the Administration block.  This will present a list of students and their scores.  Click &amp;quot;Select all&amp;quot; and then &amp;quot;Delete selected attempts&amp;quot;.}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Dealing with faulty questions===&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to deal with &amp;quot;bad&amp;quot; questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
::*Change the grade for the bad question to 0 in the quiz.  &lt;br /&gt;
::*Edit the question, changing what you will accept as a correct answer, then regrading the exam.  Remember when changing a question that the next time it is used it will be as it was in the last edit.  Also, regrading will only affect one quiz at a time.    &lt;br /&gt;
::*You can edit the question to explain the situation to the student and then you can set the grade for the question to zero. After you make such changes you should regrade the quiz by clicking on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Results&#039;&#039;&#039; tab and then the &#039;&#039;&#039;Regrade&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.  This will change the grade for all students who have taken the quiz so far.  Remember, if the question is used by another quiz, your &amp;quot;explanation&amp;quot; will appear as part of that quiz. &lt;br /&gt;
::*You can change the grade for the bad question and then move or delete the question from your question category.  The question will still appear on the quiz. Some places do not like to delete any question, but will move them to a &amp;quot;dead&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;bad&amp;quot; question category. &lt;br /&gt;
::*When you discover a bad question in your quiz, it may affect the question bank. Remember that a final might be made up of a certain number of random questions drawn from different question categories, the same categories used in a smaller subject quiz. It can be very important do something about bad or invalid questions in a question category when the categories are use in other places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Question types]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://youtu.be/Y1TaqOLPNiY The Moodle Quiz Activity]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[https://youtu.be/0FaxWt_4FQI Moodle Quiz Questions]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test erstellen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Construyendo un examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Question_bank&amp;diff=122210</id>
		<title>Question bank</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Question_bank&amp;diff=122210"/>
		<updated>2016-02-09T07:21:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows a teacher to create, preview, and edit questions in a database of question categories. The categories can be limited to being used on the site, course or quiz level.  The questions in a category can be added to a [[Quiz module|Quiz]] or to a [[Lesson module|lesson activity]] via an export process. The teacher enters the question bank by creating or editing a quiz activity or via &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Question bank&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select a category==&lt;br /&gt;
Questions are organised into categories. Initially each course has only one category called &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot;. It is good practice to create more categories to organize your questions. This not only makes it easier to find questions, but makes the use of random questions and matching question easier. You can create a hierarchy of categories because you can create subcategories inside parent categories. To add or edit categories click on the &amp;quot;[[Question categories|Categories]]&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The question editing screen shows the questions from the currently selected category. You choose this category from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu. Using the tick box below that menu you determine whether to also show the questions from all subcategories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Categories are shared in contexts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are separate question category trees in each different &#039;context&#039; in which questions are shared. The contexts available to you depend on whether you access the question bank from an activity or from a course and depend on the permissions assigned you for access to questions. See [[Question contexts]] for more information on these contexts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add a new question==&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;Questions&#039;&#039; tab to access the Question Bank page, if not there already.&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu, select a category you want to add a question to.&lt;br /&gt;
# The page will change to show the questions already in that category&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the question type you want to create from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new question&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill in the form for the question type you are creating. Each [[Question types|question type]] has its own form and has its own options.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;Save Changes&#039;&#039; at the bottom of the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit, duplicate, preview, delete and move==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:questionicons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each question in the question bank has four icons which allow you to edit, quickly duplicate, preview and delete the question. (The question may not be deleted if it is already in use elsewhere.)  To duplicate a question, click the duplicate icon (second from the left) and a copy of the question editing screen will appear. You can either edit this new copy or simply scroll down and click &amp;quot;Save changes.&amp;quot;To move a question into a different category or subcategory, click into the box on its left; scroll down to &amp;quot;With Selected...&amp;quot; and choose &amp;quot;Move to..&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
*Put the answer into the question name so you can quickly see the answers when students are asking for answers. This is especially useful if you&#039;re dealing with large sets of questions! (No option yet for viewing category or answer of question in the list of questions.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Export questions in GIFT or Moodle XML formats, then import them into a Lesson. (Future versions of Moodle will make Question bank available to both Lesson and Quiz activities.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Remember that while some of the same question types can be found in both the Quiz and Lesson modules, they can be very different.  Scoring and grading each student&#039;s choice is more robust in a Quiz.  On the other hand, each Lesson question answer also has a [[Jumps|jump]] associated it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use GIFT or other export modes to print questions and answers in a category.  Hint, clever use of word processor macros, using search and replace, can tidy up a GIFT file for printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*The question title is useful in sorting and making notes. For example, &amp;quot;ZZ remove 2010-3 Why did the Moodler cross&amp;quot;, will put this question at the bottom of the list.  Or where you want a &#039;the&#039; questions in a category to appear in a specific order, use letters or numbers, knowing that AA will come first, AB will be second in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do a copy and paste from a PDF file into the question content area.  Reduces &amp;quot;other&amp;quot; hidden code which Word, Open Office and other programs can insert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sharing and Managing Question banks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be default, teachers can manage only the questions in the context of the courses they are in. You can set up a role to allow teachers to share and manager questions on a larger scale. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use this role to create a special system-wide &amp;quot;Question bank Manager&amp;quot; instead of giving admin level or site-wide Manager access to a person managing the Questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[How to let teachers share questions between courses]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[How to minimize the question bank when doing backup/restore]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://youtu.be/0FaxWt_4FQI Moodle Quiz Questions]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragensammlung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Banco de Preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdera-bankua]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題バンク]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Questions&amp;diff=122209</id>
		<title>Questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Questions&amp;diff=122209"/>
		<updated>2016-02-09T07:19:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle course}}&lt;br /&gt;
Questions can be created in Moodle for use in [[Quiz module|quizzes]] and for import into [[Lesson module|lessons]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Question types]]==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Calculated question type|Calculated]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Simple calculated question type|Simple Calculated]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Drag and drop into text question type|Drag and drop into text]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Drag and drop markers question type|Drag and drop markers]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Drag and drop onto image question type|Drag and drop onto image]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Calculated multichoice question type|Calculated Multichoice]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Description question type|Description]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Essay question type|Essay]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Matching question type|Matching]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type|Embedded Answers (Cloze)]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Multiple Choice question type|Multiple Choice]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Random Short-Answer Matching question type|Random Short Answer Matching]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Select missing words question type|Select missing words]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Short-Answer question type|Short-Answer]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Numerical question type|Numerical]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[True/False question type|True/False]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Third-party_question_types|Third-party question types]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Managing questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Question bank]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Question categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Export questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Question behaviours]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Questions FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://youtu.be/0FaxWt_4FQI Moodle Quiz Questions]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_activity&amp;diff=122208</id>
		<title>Quiz activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_activity&amp;diff=122208"/>
		<updated>2016-02-09T07:17:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ updating MoodleBites Quiz activity video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039; activity module allows the teacher to design and build quizzes consisting of a large variety of [[Question types]], including multiple choice, true-false, short answer and drag and drop images and text. These questions are kept in the [[Question bank]] and can be re-used in different quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|New to Quiz? Try our &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Quiz quick guide]].&#039;&#039;&#039;}}&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, read &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Quiz settings]]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Building Quiz]]&#039;&#039;&#039; for more detailed information on creating and organising your quiz.The documentation &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Using Quiz]]&#039;&#039;&#039; outlines  how it works for students and teachers, and &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Quiz reports]]&#039;&#039;&#039; explains grading and statistics. If you don&#039;t see what you need in these pages, try our &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Quiz FAQ]]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Quizexample.png|thumb|450px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://youtu.be/Y1TaqOLPNiY The Moodle Quiz Activity]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[https://youtu.be/0FaxWt_4FQI Moodle Quiz Questions]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/course/view.php?id=1581 eAssessment with Moodle] by the Open University, which showcases the features of the Moodle Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Actividad de examen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdetegiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:小テストモジュール]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:Тест]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Quizy]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:測驗卷]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=122207</id>
		<title>Quiz settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=122207"/>
		<updated>2016-02-09T07:16:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ updating MoodleBites Quiz activity video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a new quiz is a two-step process. In the first step, you create the quiz activity and set its options which specify the rules for interacting with the quiz. In the second step you add questions to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
This page describes the options you can set for the quiz activity. The page [[Building Quiz]] describes how to set up the questions for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz administration==&lt;br /&gt;
When you first set up your quiz from &#039;&#039;Add an activity or resource &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;, (or, if you don&#039;t have this link, the dropdown &#039;&#039;Add an activity&amp;gt;Quiz&#039;&#039;) you will get the following settings, (which can also be changed later in the Edit Settings link of the Quiz administration settings block) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
Add a name here (which students will click on to access the quiz) and, if desired, a description of what they must do.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Timing==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can change quiz availability and duration for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block .}}&lt;br /&gt;
;Open the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:You can specify times when the quiz is accessible for people to make attempts. Before the opening time the quiz will be unavailable to students. They will be able to view the quiz introduction but will not be able to view the questions. Quizzes with start times in the future diasplay both the open and close date for students.&lt;br /&gt;
;Close the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:After the closing time, the students will not be able to start new attempts. Answers that the student submits after the quiz closing date will be saved but they will not be marked. &lt;br /&gt;
: Even after the quiz has closed students will still be able to see the quiz description and review their attempts. What exactly they will see depends on the settings you choose for review options (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
;Time limit&lt;br /&gt;
:By default, quizzes do not have a time limit, which allows students as much time as they need to complete the quiz. If you do specify a time limit, several things are done to try and ensure that quizzes are completed within that time:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quiz timer.png|thumb|Navigation block showing quiz timer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A countdown timer is shown in the quiz navigation block &lt;br /&gt;
# When the timer has run out, the quiz is submitted automatically with whatever answers have been filled in so far &lt;br /&gt;
# If a student manages to cheat and goes over the allotted time, no marks are awarded for any answers entered after the time ran out&lt;br /&gt;
;When time expires..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options as to what will happen when the time limit is up. Choose the one you need from the dropdown menu:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open attempts are submitted automatically (This is the default)&lt;br /&gt;
# There is a grace period when open attempts can be submitted, but no more questions answered&lt;br /&gt;
# Attempts must be submitted before time expires, or they are not counted&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;There is a grace period...&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then you can check the box to enable the &amp;quot;Submission grace period&amp;quot; and specify a period of time during which learners may still submit the quiz after the time is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples of how timing is handled===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#A student starts a quiz at noon. The quiz has a one-hour time-limit, and a 1 hour delay between attempts. The student gets distracted, and so actually does not submit (using the overdue handling) until 1:30pm. &#039;&#039;They are allowed to start their second attempt at 2. pm&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The quiz count-down timer submits a student&#039;s quiz attempt at the last second when time expires. Because the server is heavily loaded, it takes 30 seconds to process the student&#039;s attempt. &#039;&#039;The submission is accepted nonetheless.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Same situation as above but with a 120 second delay: &#039;&#039;The submission is rejected.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The delay is not because of server load but because the student found a way to cheat the timer. &#039;&#039;Moodle cannot know what causes a delay.The behaviour is controlled by the admin setting(quiz | graceperiodmin), 60 seconds by default.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#A student is a member of 3 groups,all of which have different override settings. Which limits will apply to this student? &#039;&#039;If there is any user-specific override, then that is used, and the group overrides for that setting are not used at all. Otherwise, if there are multiple group overrides, the most generous values are used (the earliest open date, the latest close date, the longest time limit, the most number of attempts, and the student can type any of the passwords).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
;Grade category&lt;br /&gt;
If you have categories in your gradebook, select the one you wish the quiz to be in here.&lt;br /&gt;
;Attempts allowed&lt;br /&gt;
:Students may be allowed to have multiple attempts at a quiz. This can help make the process of taking the quiz more of an educational activity rather than simply an assessment.  &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can change the allowed number of attempts for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block.}}&lt;br /&gt;
;Grade to pass&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set a passing grade for the quiz. This may be connected with [[Activity completion]] and [[Conditional activities]] such that a student will not be able to access a follow up activity until they have passed the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
;Grading method&lt;br /&gt;
:When multiple attempts are allowed, there are different ways you can use the grades to calculate the student&#039;s final grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
* Highest grade - the final grade is the highest (best) grade in any attempt&lt;br /&gt;
* Average grade - the final grade is the average (simple mean) grade of all attempts&lt;br /&gt;
* First grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the first attempt (other attempts are ignored)&lt;br /&gt;
* Last grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the most recent attempt only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Layout==&lt;br /&gt;
;New page&lt;br /&gt;
:For longer quizzes it makes sense to stretch the quiz over several pages by limiting the number of questions per page. When adding questions to the quiz, page breaks will automatically be inserted according to the setting you choose here. However, you will also be able to move page breaks around by hand later on the editing page.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note that changing this setting has no effect on questions you have already added to the quiz&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. The setting will only apply to questions you add subsequently. To change the page breaks in an existing quiz, you need to go to the quiz editing screen, tick the &#039;Show page breaks&#039; checkbox, then use the repaginate control.&lt;br /&gt;
;Navigation method (available by clicking &#039;&#039;Show More&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose &#039;&#039;Sequential&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;Free&#039;&#039;, if you want to force the student to progress through the questions in order and not go back to a previous question or skip to a later one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question behaviour==&lt;br /&gt;
;How questions behave&lt;br /&gt;
:See [[Question behaviours]].&lt;br /&gt;
;Allow redo within an attempt (available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
:If using Interactive or Immediate feedback mode, enabling this setting means students can try a question again even if they have used up their allowed attempts. This is helpful if they wish to learn from the feedback given at the end of their attempts. They will be given a different question from the one they were working on previously if there are other questions available.  A student&#039;s grade for that question slot is based on the most recent question they have started.&lt;br /&gt;
;Each attempt builds on the last (available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple attempts are allowed and this setting is set to Yes, then each new attempt contains the results of the previous attempt. This allows the student on the new attempt to concentrate on just those questions that were answered incorrectly on the previous attempt. If this option is chosen then each attempt by a particular student uses the same questions in the same order, independent of randomization settings. To show a fresh quiz on every attempt, select No for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Review options==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizreview.png|thumb|600px|Review options expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section controls what information students will be shown when they review their past attempts at the quiz, and during the attempt in adaptive mode.  It is a matrix with check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The various pieces of information that can be controlled are:&lt;br /&gt;
; The attempt: Will show how the student responded to each question.&lt;br /&gt;
; Whether correct: Displays whether the students response to each question is correct or incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
; Marks:  Reveals the marks awarded to the student and the grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
; Specific feedback: Will show the feedback for the response to the answer as set when adding the question to the quiz. Each response to a question can have feedback for both correct and incorrect answers.&lt;br /&gt;
; General feedback: Displays the general feedback for the whole question as set when adding the question to the quiz. You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. &lt;br /&gt;
; Right answer:  Reveals the correct answer to each question, whether the student answered correctly or not (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
; Overall feedback: Displays feedback for the entire quiz as set in the quiz settings (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each of the above items, you can determine the timeframe when the students will see them:&lt;br /&gt;
; During the attempt : is only available when &#039;&#039;‘How questions behave’&#039;&#039; has been set to &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback’&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback with CBM’&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;‘Interactive with multiple tries’&#039;&#039;. If set to one of these options then a &#039;&#039;‘Check’&#039;&#039; button will appear below the answer and when clicked the student will submit that response and then receive immediate feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
; Immediately after the attempt : means within 2 minutes of the student clicking &amp;quot;submit all and finish&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
; Later, while the quiz is still open : means after 2 minutes, but before the close date (if the quiz does not have a close date, this phase never ends).&lt;br /&gt;
; After the quiz is closed : means what it says (you never get here for quizzes without a close date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Checking any of the boxes in the timeframe row, will reveal the test to the student. For example, to allow students to see their quiz immediately after taking it but not later, make sure none of the boxes in &amp;quot;Later&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;After&amp;quot; rows are checked.  The student will be able to see their grade but not get into the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Currently, the Answers display is a bit inconsistent between different question types. For example, the matching question type shows students which of their responses are correct, but does not tell them the right answer for the ones they got wrong. The short answer and multiple choices question types do tell the student what the correct answer is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the capability &#039;View hidden grades&#039; [[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewhidden|moodle/grade:viewhidden]] (typically teachers and administrators) are not affected by these settings and will always by able to review all information about a student&#039;s attempt at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your list of review options, you must have &#039;The attempt&#039; (the first option in the lists) selected  before you can enable the options to show &#039;Whether correct&#039;, &#039;Specific feedback&#039;, &#039;General feedback&#039;, and &#039;Right answer&#039;. If you choose not to let the students review the attempt, your only options are to display &#039;Marks&#039; and &#039;Overall feedback&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
;Show the user&#039;s picture&lt;br /&gt;
:It is now possible, when displaying the user&#039;s profile picture for proctoring purposes, to choose whether a large image or thumbnail will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
;Decimal places in grades&lt;br /&gt;
:This option determines how many digits will be shown after the decimal separator (see  [[dev:Translation_langconfig|langconfig]] ) when the grade is displayed. A setting of 0 for example means that the grades are displayed as integers. This setting is only used for the display of grades, not for the display or marking of answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Extra restrictions on attempts==&lt;br /&gt;
;Require password&lt;br /&gt;
:If you specify a password in here then participants must enter the same password before they are allowed to make an attempt on the quiz. This is useful to give only a selected group of students access to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
;Require network address&lt;br /&gt;
:You can restrict access for a quiz to particular subnets on the LAN or Internet by specifying a comma-separated list of partial or full IP address numbers. This is especially useful for a proctored (invigilated) quiz, where you want to be sure that only people in a certain room are able to access the quiz. For example: 192.168. , 231.54.211.0/20, 231.3.56.211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There are three types of numbers you can use (you can not use text based domain names like example.com): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Full IP addresses, such as 192.168.10.1 which will match a single computer (or proxy). &lt;br /&gt;
# Partial addresses, such as 192.168 which will match anything starting with those numbers. &lt;br /&gt;
# CIDR notation, such as 231.54.211.0/20 which allows you to specify more detailed subnets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Spaces are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Enforced delay between attempts&lt;br /&gt;
:You can set a time (from seconds to weeks) between the first and second attempt of a quiz. You can also (or alternatively) set a time from seconds to weeks for subsequent attempts after the second attempt. Thus, you might allow a student to take the quiz twice immediately with no delay, but if they want to improve their score with a third attempt, they are forced to wait a week and use the time for extra revision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Browser security&lt;br /&gt;
:This is by default an advanced field, visible by clicking &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:The options in this section offer various ways to try to restrict how students may try to &#039;cheat&#039; while attempting a quiz. However, this is not a simple issue, and what in one situation is considered &#039;cheating&#039; may, in another situation, just be effective use of information technology. (For example, the ability to quickly find answers using a search engine.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Note also that this is not just at problem of technology with a technical solution. Cheating has been going on since long before computers, and while computers make certain actions, like copy and paste, easier, they also make it easier for teachers to detect cheating - for example using the quiz reports. The options provided here are not fool-proof, and while they do make some forms of cheating harder for students, they also make it more inconvenient for students to attempt the quizzes, and they are not fool-proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Full screen pop-up with some JavaScript security&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There is a limit to what the quiz, which runs on a web server, can do to restrict what the student sitting at their computer can do while attempting the quiz. However, this option does what is possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz will only start if the student has a JavaScript-enabled web-browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz appears in a fullscreen popup window that covers all the other windows and has no  course navigation controls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:seb24.png|thumb|Student view of quiz question with full screen popup.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The students are prevented, as far as is possible, from using facilities like copy and paste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Require the use of Safe Exam Browser&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:This option will only appear if your administrator has enabled it in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safe exam browser|Safe Exam Browser]] is a customised web browser that must be downloaded and installed on the computer that the student uses to attempt the quiz. It restricts student use more effectively than a pop up window option.  Features include full screen, without web navigation options, shortcut keys including copy and paste are disabled and of course surfing the web during an exam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall feedback==&lt;br /&gt;
Overall feedback is shown to a student after they have completed an attempt at the quiz. The text that is shown can depend on the grade the student got. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 100%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 40%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then students who score between 100% and 40% will see the &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot; message, and those who score between 39.99% and 0% will see &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;. That is, the grade boundaries define ranges of grades, and each feedback string is displayed to scores within the appropriate range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grade boundaries can be specified either as a percentage, for example &amp;quot;31.41%&amp;quot;, or as a number, for example &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;. If your quiz is out of 10 marks, a grade boundary of 7 means 7/10 or better. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the maximum and minimum grade boundaries (100% and 0%) are set automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set as many or as few grade boundaries as you wish. The form allows you up to 5 ranges at first, but you can add more by clicking the &amp;quot;Add 3 fields to form&amp;quot; button underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re getting confusing error messages about a boundary being out of sequence (when it&#039;s obviously *in* sequence), or &amp;quot;boundaries must be between 0% and 100%&amp;quot; (and they are) -- check that the Maximum Grade for this quiz is set to something greater than zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Outcomes==&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will only appear if [[Outcomes]] have been enabled by the administrator and are used in the course. See [[Outcomes]] for how to remove an outcome once it has been added to a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz completion===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following automatic activity completion conditions apply to the quiz:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Require view&#039;&#039; - the student clicks on the quiz to view it&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Require grade&#039;&#039; - the student obtains a grade&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Require a passing grade&#039;&#039; - a &#039;Grade to pass&#039; is specified for the quiz in the gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;All available attempts completed&#039;&#039; - a certain number of attempts were allowed on the quiz and the student has completed them all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group and User overrides==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:overridesquiz.png|thumb|Location of overrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates, timing and number of allowed attempts may be changed for individual users or groups by following the links &#039;&#039;Group Overrides&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;User Overrides&#039;&#039; in the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular group, click the &amp;quot;add group override&amp;quot; button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;Group overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular user or users, click the &amp;quot;add user override&amp;quot;button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;User overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The time period settings for a quiz (such as time limit, submission grace period, autosave period and so on)  can be set here with a duration of seconds, minutes, hours, days or weeks. These defaults will then be used when new quizzes are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Autosave period&lt;br /&gt;
:If enabled, student responses will be saved at regular period according to the selection here. the default is one minute. This is useful so that students don&#039;t lose work but does increase the load on the server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How questions behave can be configured in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Question behaviours&amp;gt;Manage question &lt;br /&gt;
behaviours&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://youtu.be/Y1TaqOLPNiY The Moodle Quiz Activity]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[https://youtu.be/0FaxWt_4FQI Moodle Quiz Questions]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_activity&amp;diff=122206</id>
		<title>Quiz activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_activity&amp;diff=122206"/>
		<updated>2016-02-09T07:07:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039; activity module allows the teacher to design and build quizzes consisting of a large variety of [[Question types]], including multiple choice, true-false, short answer and drag and drop images and text. These questions are kept in the [[Question bank]] and can be re-used in different quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|New to Quiz? Try our &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Quiz quick guide]].&#039;&#039;&#039;}}&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, read &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Quiz settings]]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Building Quiz]]&#039;&#039;&#039; for more detailed information on creating and organising your quiz.The documentation &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Using Quiz]]&#039;&#039;&#039; outlines  how it works for students and teachers, and &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Quiz reports]]&#039;&#039;&#039; explains grading and statistics. If you don&#039;t see what you need in these pages, try our &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Quiz FAQ]]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Quizexample.png|thumb|450px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/I87h6ijtjls The Moodle Quiz Activity]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/course/view.php?id=1581 eAssessment with Moodle] by the Open University, which showcases the features of the Moodle Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Actividad de examen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdetegiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:小テストモジュール]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:Тест]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Quizy]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:測驗卷]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Grades_FAQ&amp;diff=122041</id>
		<title>Grades FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Grades_FAQ&amp;diff=122041"/>
		<updated>2016-01-19T20:32:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I change how grades are displayed?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grades may be displayed as as actual grades, as percentages (in reference to the minimum and maximum grades) or as letters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default grade display type for the site is set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; [[Grade item settings]]&#039;&#039;. However, this may be changed at course level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change how grades are displayed for particular [[Grade items|grade items]], or category and course summaries (called aggregations):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Gradebook setup&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Edit then edit settings link opposite the grade item or category total. (For the course total, click the Edit then &#039;Edit settings&#039; link at the top of the actions column, opposite the name of the course.)&lt;br /&gt;
# On the edit category page, click the &#039;Show more...&#039; link under &#039;Category total&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# From the Grade display type menu, select real (for actual grades), percentage or letter.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button at the bottom of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, to change how grades are displayed for the whole course:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Gradebook setup&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Course grade settings&amp;quot; in the administration block.&lt;br /&gt;
# From the Grade display type menu, select real (for actual grades), percentage or letter, or a combination of these.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I hide entered grades until a specified date?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set a &amp;quot;Hidden until&amp;quot; date:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Gradebook setup&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the edit icon opposite the activity for which a &amp;quot;Hidden until&amp;quot; date is to be set.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the edit grade item page, ensure that advanced settings are displayed. (Click the &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot; button if not.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Enable the &amp;quot;Hidden until&amp;quot; setting by unchecking the disable checkbox, then set a date.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Is it possible to show the teachers/administrators&#039; grades in the grader report? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, at the site level you can define which roles will appear in the grader report. This can be found in [[General_grade_settings#Graded_Roles|Administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; General settings]]. Also read [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=92612 this discussion] for some more ideas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why can&#039;t I change a grade within an assignment after changing it in the gradebook?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you edit a grade directly in the gradebook, an &amp;quot;overridden&amp;quot; flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I get groups to show up in the grader report?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For groups to show up in the grader report, group mode should be set to visible or separate groups in the [[Course settings|course settings]]. This will result in a groups dropdown menu being displayed, enabling a teacher to view the grades of all participants, or only the grades for a selected group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The quiz grades keep disappearing from the student view, even after I un-hide them!===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check your quiz settings. Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Review options&#039;&#039;&#039; heading, in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Later, while the quiz is still open&#039;&#039;&#039; and/or the &#039;&#039;&#039;After the quiz is closed&#039;&#039;&#039; columns, you probably have Scores un-checked. Each time a student completes a quiz, these settings are consulted and the scores will be hidden from &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; students. If your students don&#039;t all take the quiz at the same time, it can look like quiz scores reset themselves to &#039;hidden&#039; randomly, even after you un-hide them. (If there is no end date for the quiz, the quiz never actually closes and will never display grades unless Scores is checked in &amp;quot;Later, while the quiz is still open.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I make the gradebook simpler for teachers?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Simplifying the gradebook by changing permissions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grades and user removals==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What happens to gradebook data when a user is unenrolled from a course?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On re-enrolling, you can recover their grades from before. See the section &#039;Unenrolment and grade history&#039; in [[Unenrolment]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced grading==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why can&#039;t I see the advanced grading option??===&lt;br /&gt;
To see the option for Advanced grading, you first have to create an assignment and choose Advanced grading/Rubric from the Grading  method dropdown. Advanced grading will then appear in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Assignment administration.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I allow teachers to save rubrics as templates for others?===&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new role and assign it in the system context. Give this role the capability &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:sharegradingforms&#039;&#039; (for sharing as a template) and if desired &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:managesharedforms&#039;&#039; (for editing or deleting templates created by others) Assign this role to those teachers you wish to have this ability.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do students see the Marking guide?===&lt;br /&gt;
Assuming the teacher has allowed this in the [[Marking guide]] settings, the student may click &amp;quot;submissions grading&amp;quot; under the assignment name in their navigation block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:submissionsgrading.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why can&#039;t students see feedback when Blind Marking is used?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you use &#039;&#039;&#039;Blind Marking&#039;&#039;&#039; to conceal student identities when assessing in the Assignment module, it waits until &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; submissions are marked, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Reveal student identities&#039;&#039;&#039; is clicked, to enter final grades into the Gradebook. Only at this point does it release Rubric marks/comments and inline feedback for student view (if Advanced Grading: Rubrics and Inline Comment Feedback are used in the Assignment).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reports ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== How do I create my own custom gradebook reports? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a [[Development:Gradebook_Report_Tutorial|tutorial]] explaining all the main steps involved.&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I sort or change the order of column headings?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to Grades link, then select one of the &amp;quot;Category &amp;amp; items&amp;quot; actions from the pulldown on the top left.  Use the move icon to change the position of the graded item.   And/or you could create categories for the items and move them into a category so they will be grouped that way first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I remove user ID numbers and/or email addresses from the grader report===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; [[Roles settings|User policies]]&#039;&#039; and untick the &#039;ID number&#039; and/or &#039;email address&#039; checkboxes for &#039;Show user identity&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this will result in ID numbers and/or email addresses not being shown when searching for users and displaying lists of users. See the section &#039;Show user identity&#039; in [[Roles settings]] for a list of locations where user identity fields are shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I interpret the quiz report statistics?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Quiz_report_statistics Quiz report statistics] in the developers documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aggregation ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== I can&#039;t find where to change the aggregation type for my gradebook categories! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Gradebook setup&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the edit settings link opposite the category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I grade some of my activities without the results affecting my students&#039; course total? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Gradebook setup&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Add two [[Grade categories]], one for your &amp;quot;Graded activities&amp;quot; and one for your &amp;quot;Not graded activities&amp;quot;. In the &amp;quot;Not graded activities&amp;quot; category choose &amp;quot;None&amp;quot; in grading type.&lt;br /&gt;
#Ensure that &amp;quot;Aggregate including subcategories&amp;quot; (an option visible only in &amp;quot;full view&amp;quot;) is unchecked for your top level course grade category.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to completely hide the &amp;quot;Not graded activities&amp;quot; category from your students tick the &amp;quot;Hidden&amp;quot; icon too.&lt;br /&gt;
#Save your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#Move all your normally graded activities into the &amp;quot;Graded activities&amp;quot; category.&lt;br /&gt;
#Move all your excluded from grading activities into &amp;quot;Not graded activities&amp;quot; category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Following the above steps the not graded activities will be completely hidden from your students. So...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039; you want the activity grades of the &amp;quot;Not graded activities&amp;quot; category, to remain visible to your student without their grades affecting their course total, simply click the eye to show the &amp;quot;Not graded activities&amp;quot; category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039; you want students to be able to see the activity grades and the category total of the &amp;quot;Not graded activities&amp;quot;, then you have to let the category visible and also choose a grading type between value, scale or text, by editing the category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case you can exclude the &amp;quot;Not graded activities&amp;quot; from course total using the &amp;quot;Weighted mean of grades&amp;quot; aggregation method in Course category and assigning 100 weight to the &amp;quot;Graded activities&amp;quot; and 0 weight to the &amp;quot;Not graded activities&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039; you don&#039;t want to use grade categories, you can also exclude the grades of a specific activity by changing the &amp;quot;Multiplicator&amp;quot; (visible only in &amp;quot;full view&amp;quot;) from 1.0 into 0.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Last, &#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039; you want to exclude the grade of an activity only to one or some specific students, then follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
#From the grader report &amp;quot;Turn editing on&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Edit grade&amp;quot; icon of the activity of the student you want to exclude.&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Edit grade page, check the tick box next to the &amp;quot;Excluded&amp;quot; option and &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== My student completed only one activity out of 5, but his course total shows 100%. How do I show a more &amp;quot;progressive&amp;quot; course total? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Step-by-Step Explanation ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Gradebook setup&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the top line there is a folder icon and an edit icon on the right, click the edit icon&lt;br /&gt;
# You&#039;ll then see the title &amp;quot;Grade category,&amp;quot; the 3rd item is &amp;quot;Aggregate only non-empty grades.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Uncheck this.&lt;br /&gt;
# Save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Another Explanation ====&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only non-empty grades are aggregated, the others are ignored. However, you can change this setting as well as others that affect the course total, by turning &amp;quot;Editing&amp;quot; on in the grader report, and clicking the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; icon next to the course category (the very top row of the grader report).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can untick the box &amp;quot;Aggregate only non-empty grades&amp;quot; if you want to show a more &amp;quot;progressive&amp;quot; score for each student. Their empty grades will count as a 0 and will be counted in the course mean/total.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer to show a sum of points, rather than a percentage, you can change the course category&#039;s aggregation method to &amp;quot;Natural&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I display the average grade for my course categories (not grade categories)? ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 3.0 there is no way to aggregate course totals within each category. The gradebook is course-centered, and there is currently no User Interface for showing grades within an entire course category at once.  However, the Grades link from the User dropdown menu will show students their Total Grades from each course that they are enrolled in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why is the Category Total blank for one of my categories? ===&lt;br /&gt;
One possibility is that you accidentally entered some grades into the Category Total column and then erased them.  When you do that, an override flag gets set and then the totals won&#039;t calculate.  Here&#039;s how to check, and fix it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#  Go to the [[Grader report]] view of the gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
#  Click the &amp;quot;Turn editing on&amp;quot; button for the gradebook.  (There&#039;s a separate one for the gradebook from the one on the main page.)&lt;br /&gt;
#  Find the box for the problem category and the first student affected.&lt;br /&gt;
#  Click on the icon of a gear *in that box*.&lt;br /&gt;
#  See if the box marked &amp;quot;[[Grade_editing#Overridden|Overridden]]&amp;quot; (third line down) is checked.  If it is, uncheck it.  &lt;br /&gt;
#  Repeat (4) and (5) for each student affected,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Overridden grades are normally shaded a dark yellow in the grader report, which makes finding them much easier.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Categories ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== How many depths of categories/subcategories can I create? ===&lt;br /&gt;
There is no programmatic limit, but there are practical limits. Very deeply nested structures are difficult to manage. 3 levels of categories should be sufficient for most situations. Note that there is always at least one level of categories, since the Course category always encompasses all other categories and grade items, can cannot be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== I can&#039;t find setting X in the grade category edit page! Where is it? ===&lt;br /&gt;
If a setting documented on the [[Grade categories]] page does not appear on your edit page, it may mean that it is set globally in your site. See [[Grade_category_settings#Forcing_settings|Forcing settings]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Outcomes ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== I want to set up an outcome item for my course. What are the steps required? ===&lt;br /&gt;
#The site administrator needs to have enabled outcomes via &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site Administration &amp;gt; Advanced Features &amp;gt;Enable Outcomes&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
#In your course, go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Course administration&amp;gt;Grades&amp;gt;Scales&#039;&#039; and create the scale you need.&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Scales#Creating_a_new_scale|Create a scale]]&lt;br /&gt;
#In Administration&amp;gt;Course administration&amp;gt;Outcomes, create a course outcome assigning it to the scale you just created.&lt;br /&gt;
#Read the [[Outcomes| outcomes documentation]] for instructions).&lt;br /&gt;
#You can now give your students a rating on the outcome dimension you just created. If you created a standard outcome, you will be able to use it in other courses and follow your students&#039; performance across these courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I remove an outcome from an activity?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An outcome can be removed from an activity by deleting it via &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Gradebook setup&#039;&#039;. This results in the outcomes being deselected on the update activity page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modules ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== The activity module (Module name) doesn&#039;t support grading. How can I give my students a grade anyway? ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a [[Grade_items#Manual_grade_items|grade item]] manually in the gradebook. You will have to grade your students through the [[Grader report]] interface (in editing mode).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== I just graded some of my students using the (Module name) interface, but the results aren&#039;t showing up in the grader report. What&#039;s going on? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some of the possible reasons:&lt;br /&gt;
#The site settings&amp;gt;Grades&amp;gt;General settings may not have the correct graded roles checked off to appear in grade book.  If you see no students in the Gradebook but do see columns for the graded activities, then check the graded role settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#The corresponding [[Grade items|grade item]] is [[Grade_locking#In_grade_items|locked]], or its parent [[Grade categories|category]] is [[Grade_locking#In_grade_categories|locked]].&lt;br /&gt;
#The module code is not using the [[Development:Grades#API_for_communication_with_modules.2Fblocks|gradebook API]] correctly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== I just created a new assignment with the &amp;quot;Grade&amp;quot; setting set to &amp;quot;No grade&amp;quot;, but it still appears in the gradebook ===&lt;br /&gt;
The reason is that the gradebook is now the place where both numerical and textual types of feedback are recorded for all activity modules. The word &amp;quot;Grading&amp;quot; in assignment relates only to numerical grades, but the ability to give text feedback remains, and must be recorded in the gradebook. This is why a grade item is created for it. You can hide the grade item if you do not want it to appear in the user reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Weights and extra credits==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do weighted grades influence the category or course total?===&lt;br /&gt;
Weighted grades behave differently in Weighted Mean of Grades and Natural Grading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WEIGHTED MEAN OF GRADES&lt;br /&gt;
A weight (also called coefficient) only has meaning in reference to other weights. If you only have one grade item, changing its weight will not have any effect. However, if you have two grade items, each with a different weight, the &amp;quot;heavier&amp;quot; item will have more influence on the total grade than the &amp;quot;lighter&amp;quot; one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the weights to any positive numerical value you choose. Usually, at least one of the weights will be 1 and serve as the baseline for other weights. If another item has a weight of 2, its grades will be multiplied by 2 compared with the grades of the first grade item, before being averaged. The denominator used for averaging is the sum of all the weights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example follows:&lt;br /&gt;
  item 1 weight: 1&lt;br /&gt;
  item 2 weight: 3&lt;br /&gt;
  item 3 weight: 0.5&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  item 1 grade: 40/100&lt;br /&gt;
  item 2 grade: 60/100&lt;br /&gt;
  item 3 grade: 20/100&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  Calculation: &lt;br /&gt;
  total = ((40 * 1) + (60 * 3) + (20 * 0.5)) / (1 + 3 + 0.5)&lt;br /&gt;
        = (40 + 180 + 10) / (4.5)&lt;br /&gt;
        = 230 / 4.5&lt;br /&gt;
        = 51.11&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  The total for this category will then be 51.11 out of 100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NATURAL GRADING&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural grading automatically calculates the weight value in response to the maximum grade that is set for all of the grade items.  The weighting column will always add up to 100%.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you change the weight for one of the grade items, the weighting of the other grade items will all readjust in response to the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  item 1 grade: 40/100&lt;br /&gt;
  item 2 grade: 60/100&lt;br /&gt;
  item 3 grade: 20/100&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural Weight (because all items are of equal value (100 points):&lt;br /&gt;
  item 1:  33.33%&lt;br /&gt;
  item 2:  33.33%&lt;br /&gt;
  item 3:  33.33%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you then adjust the weight for item 1 to 50%, the other two grades will adjust to 25% each -&lt;br /&gt;
  item 1:  50%&lt;br /&gt;
  item 2:  25%&lt;br /&gt;
  item 3:  25%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calculation: &lt;br /&gt;
  total = ((40 * 50) + (60 * 25) + (20 * 25)) / 100&lt;br /&gt;
        = (2000 + 1500 + 500) / 100&lt;br /&gt;
        = 4000 / 100&lt;br /&gt;
        = 40&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Do I have to put a value in each &amp;quot;weight&amp;quot; input box?===&lt;br /&gt;
WEIGHTED MEAN OF GRADES&lt;br /&gt;
No. If you do not put a value, it will default to 1. If all items are set to 1 then they all have equal weight. If you set a weight to 0, the item&#039;s grades will not count at all in the category or course average.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NATURAL GRADING&lt;br /&gt;
The weights will adjust in response to the weights that you do change.  If you only change 2 of 6 total grade items&#039; weight, the other four weights will adjust so that all weights add up to 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Do all the weights have to add up to 100 or some similar value?===&lt;br /&gt;
WEIGHTED MEAN OF GRADES&lt;br /&gt;
No, the numbers you put as weights are completely arbitrary. They must be positive numbers, and can add up to anything you want. Note however that the following four sets of weights are identical in value:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  (1 1.75 3)&lt;br /&gt;
  (4 7 12)&lt;br /&gt;
  (8 14 24)&lt;br /&gt;
  (400 700 1200)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NATURAL GRADING&lt;br /&gt;
Natural grading weights MUST equal 100%.  If you manually adjust the values of EVERY grade item, and they do not equal 100%, upon saving they will be adjusted to equal 100%, retaining your weighting preferences.  If you only adjust a few of your grade items, the remaining items weights will be adjusted so that the total comes to 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
If you set your weights as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
 item1: 2&lt;br /&gt;
 item2: 2&lt;br /&gt;
 item3: 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Natural grading will adjust them as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
 item1: 25%&lt;br /&gt;
 item2: 25%&lt;br /&gt;
 item3: 50%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the difference between Weight and Extra Credit?===&lt;br /&gt;
Weight is only available with &amp;quot;Weighted mean of grades&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Natural&amp;quot; grading. For the &amp;quot;Simple weighted mean of grades&amp;quot;, the weight is taken from the grade item&#039;s maximum grade. A weight is used to give a grade item more or less importance in the computation of the category total or average, compared with the other items of the same category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra credit replaces grade item weight if the aggregation method is &amp;quot;Mean of grades (with extra credits)&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Natural&amp;quot;, or &amp;quot;Simple weighted mean of grades&amp;quot;. The effect of extra credit is different in each case, hence some confusion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mean of grades (with extra credits): A value of 0 does nothing. Any other value is used to multiply the grade and add it to the total after the computation of the mean. This grade is not used in the computation of the mean, however, only added afterwards. Additionally, this cannot bring the category total over its maximum grade unless grades over 100% are enabled by the site administrator (since 1.9.5). This grade item is not counted either in the denominator used to compute the category mean.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Natural: Extra credit is a checkbox, not a number. Normally, with Natural, the category&#039;s maximum grade is the sum of the maximum grades of all its grade items. If one of them is set as &amp;quot;Extra Credit&amp;quot;, however, its maximum grade is not added to the category&#039;s maximum grade, but its grades will be. This way it is possible to achieve maximum grade (or grades over maximum if enabled by the site administrator) in the category without getting the maximum grade in all the grade items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Simple weighted mean of grades:  Extra credit is a checkbox, not a number.  The &amp;quot;Extra Credit&amp;quot; grades are counted in the numerator used to compute the category mean, but not the denominator.  See [[Category_aggregation#Simple_weighted_mean|here]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To change a graded item to an extra credit item for Natural or Simple weighted mean of grades:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Gradebook setup&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Find the extra credit item. To the right of the item, click &amp;quot;Edit &amp;gt; Edit Settings.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Grade Item page, scroll to the bottom and check &amp;quot;Extra credit.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I create an assignment for which students can receive a grade above the maximum/above 100%?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Ask your administrator to go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039; and tick the box &#039;Unlimited grades&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Grade point maximum (just below the unlimited grades setting) enter the maximum grade point value you wish to be available for all activities.&lt;br /&gt;
#In Grade point default (if you wish) enter the default grade point value you wish to display, if you want it to be above 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradepointmaxdefault.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why can&#039;t I enter a grade higher than the maximum?===&lt;br /&gt;
See the answer to the  question above. Ask your administrator to check &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
==Formulas==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I give a fixed score for a successful quiz attempt===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suppose you want to give 5 points for a passing grade (say, 40) in a certain quiz (which has a maximum score of 100). Possible scenario ([http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=148576]): extra credit points to every student that gets a &amp;quot;passing grade&amp;quot; in a &amp;quot;practice test&amp;quot; at the end of each chapter covered in the course, to encourage them to practice after the homework quizzes and to get familiar with a &amp;quot;test type&amp;quot; situation before the actual test.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following formula should do the trick:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round((||quiz||/40)-0.49,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The formula may be added to a designated grade item or category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample calculations:&lt;br /&gt;
 Score 40 (pass):&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round((40/40)-0.49,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round(1-0.49,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round(0.51,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(1,1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =1*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Score 39 (not pass):&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round((39/40)-0.49,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round(0.975-0.49,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round(0.485,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(0,1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =0*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Score 100 (pass):&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round((100/40)-0.49,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round(2.5-0.49,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(round(2.01,0),1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =min(2,1)*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =1*5&lt;br /&gt;
 =5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://youtu.be/lWcheVbQe2E The Moodle Gradebook]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=2122 Gradebook forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions: (These forum discussions are from before the implementation of the Natural Grading aggregation method but have been left here because they still contain some good information)&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123143 Excluding practice quizzes from gradebook]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=193705 Course total not sum of max grade column?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=167596 Why do only certain items have multiplicator &amp;amp; offset boxes?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=235640 Extra credit]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=269534#unread Change grading method only for some students]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ca:PMF de les qualificacions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bewertungen FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Calificaciones FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ des notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:評定FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Grade_settings&amp;diff=122040</id>
		<title>Grade settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Grade_settings&amp;diff=122040"/>
		<updated>2016-01-19T20:31:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Course grade settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Course grade settings.png|thumb|Course grade settings]]Course grade settings determine how the gradebook appears for all participants in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course grade settings are found in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grade administration &amp;gt; Course grade settings&#039;&#039; or via the gradebook Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default course grade settings are set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grader report preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Grader report preferences.png|thumb|Grader report preferences]]Teachers can set their preferences for the grader report via  &#039;My preferences&#039;  These settings will apply to all courses for that teacher. The teacher may change them at any time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example it&#039;s possible to set the grader report to only show active participants or all participants (including suspended users) from the &#039;&#039;Show only active enrolments&#039;&#039; setting. (Users may be suspended from the course  by changing their status in &#039;&#039;Enrolled users&amp;gt;Edit enrolment.&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default grader report preferences are set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; Report settings &amp;gt; Grader report&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.4.2 onwards, the default number of students per page (&#039;&#039;grade_report_studentsperpage&#039;&#039;) can safely be increased without any loss of data when grading large numbers of students with many assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default values for all grade settings can be set by an administrator. The easiest way to do so is to log in as admin then browse a course gradebook and follow the &#039;Change defaults&#039; links.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following additional grade settings can be found in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039;. The settings will affect all gradebooks used by all teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Graded Roles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded roles are the type of user that will appear in the gradebook. Most of the time &amp;quot;student&amp;quot; is the only one needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User profile report===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default user profile report setting has just one option, &#039;User report&#039;, unless a custom user report has been added to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can view the user reports for all or selected students in the course in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grades administration &amp;gt; User report&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include scales in aggregation===&lt;br /&gt;
Scales can be included as numbers in all aggregated grades across all gradebooks in all courses. Changing this setting will force all aggregated grades to be recalculated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is checked (and it is by default) then all custom scales will have a corresponding value that is assigned based on the number of options in the scale (ie. three values will have values of 1,2,3) and this will be included in the grade aggregation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable publishing===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gradepublishing.png|thumb|Grade publishing settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grade publishing is a way of importing and exporting grades via a URL without being logged in to Moodle. Grade publishing is intended for administrators only. Security implications should be thoroughly considered before allowing non-admin users to publish grades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grade publishing may be enabled by checking the gradepublishing box. If enabled, administrators are provided with [[Grade export|grade export]] publishing settings in each course gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Recover grades default===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When [[Enrolled users|manually enrolling]] a student in a course, there is an option &#039;Recover user&#039;s old grades if possible&#039;, however this checkbox is easy to miss. Enabling &#039;Recover grades default&#039; results in &#039;Recover user&#039;s old grades if possible&#039; being ticked for every course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:enrol users enrolment options.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Unlimited grades===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can enter grades over 100% directly in the gradebook if the &#039;&#039;unlimitedgrades&#039;&#039; setting is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade point maximum/Grade point default==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can set here the maximum point value in activities, and also the default point value which will appear when a teacher uses points for activities in their course. (Both these are set to 100 initially)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradepointmaxdefault.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:edit|Edit grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:export|Export grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:hide|Hide/unhide grades or items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:import|Import grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:lock|Lock grades or items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:manage|Manage grade items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:managegradingforms|Manage advanced grading methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:manageletters|Manage grade letters]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:manageoutcomes|Manage grade outcomes]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:unlock|Unlock grades or items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:view|View own grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewall|View grades of other users]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewhidden|View hidden grades for owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/QWE0c_-NjHE Moodle 2 Grades Administration settings]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
* [https://youtu.be/lWcheVbQe2E The Moodle Gradebook for Teachers]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bewertungseinstellungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de calificación]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres de notes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Grader_report&amp;diff=122039</id>
		<title>Grader report</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Grader_report&amp;diff=122039"/>
		<updated>2016-01-19T20:29:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}&lt;br /&gt;
All the grades for each student in a course can be found in the course gradebook, or &#039;Grader report&#039; in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Grades&#039;&#039;. For an introduction to the gradebook, see the HQ screencast: [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XLxALUCbBgI Where is the Gradebook?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grader report collects [[Grade_items|items]] that have been graded from the various parts of Moodle that are assessed, and allows you to view and change them as well as sort them out into [[Grade_categories|categories]] and calculate totals in various ways. When you add an assessed item in a Moodle course, the gradebook automatically creates space for the grades it will produce and also adds the grades themselves as they are generated, either by the system or by you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grades displayed are initially displayed as the raw marks from the assessments themselves, so will depend on how you set those up e.g. an essay out of 36 will appear as however many raw marks that student got, not a percentage (although this can be changed later, see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that various default options for the gradebook are set at system level by the administrator in  and can be marked as being overridable by you, or fixed. This means that the options will not always be set up the same way for every user when they see the grader report for the first time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Hiding settings globally==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New settings hide parts of the user interface:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Grades&amp;gt;General settings&#039;&#039;:  &#039;Show minimum grade&#039; . If this setting is disabled, the minimum grade will default to zero and cannot be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Grades&amp;gt;Grade category settings&#039;&#039;: &#039;Allow category grades to be manually overridden&#039;. If this setting is disabled, users cannot override category grades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Scrolling through the gradebook===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The gradebook allows for smooth and stable scrolling horizontally and vertically through grades. It uses the whole window, making it accessible on all platforms.( Note: horizontal scrolling is at the bottom of the browser window, and there is no horizontal scrollbar at the top.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:scrolling28a.png|thumb|500px|Scrolling in all directions]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:wholewindow.png|thumb|500px|Using the whole window]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:newgradereporta.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Display==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along the top of the grader report are several rows: first the course, then the category, then the columns for each graded activity (for example: Assignment, Quiz, Lesson). Any activities settings which were left &amp;quot;uncategorised&amp;quot; will appear in the general category which is named after the course by default (any category name can be changed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:gradereportcategories.png|center|thumb|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a row showing the range of possible scores by selecting &#039;Show ranges&#039; in &#039;My report preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three ways that the categories can be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grades only - without the category totals column&lt;br /&gt;
* Aggregates - Category total column only&lt;br /&gt;
* Full view - grades and the aggregates (the totals column for the category) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each section has a small icon immediately to the right of its name. Clicking this will cycle through these display modes for that category;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:grades3iconsa.png|thumb|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorting by columns===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can sort by any column.  Click the [[Image:iconsort.png]] symbol near the top of a column to sort by that column (1 below).  This will change the symbol to a single down arrow.  Clicking again will sort lowest-to-highest, changing the symbol to an up arrow.  The arrows will toggle between these two states until you click on a different column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access the [[Single view]] by clicking the pencil icon next to the arrows (2 below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:iconsgrades.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can sort the students by clicking the arrow (1 below), access individual [[User report| user reports]] by clicking the icon (2 below) and similar to the grade items you can access [[Single view]] by clicking the pencil icon (3 below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:studentsort.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Searching and filtering the gradebook===&lt;br /&gt;
If you change the course settings Group mode to Visible groups or Separate groups a drop-down menu will appear in the gradebook to allow you to filter your students by groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to search students by first name and last name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradebooksearch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Editing anything in the gradebook refers to editing the grades &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; and none of the available operations bear any relationship to editing the main course page i.e. the appearance of your course page cannot be influenced by anything you do in the gradebook. The &amp;quot;Turn editing on&amp;quot; button functions separately from the main course one, so editing can be on in the gradebook, but simultaneously off when you switch back to course view. This is because editing grades and editing the course page are separate capabilities.   Roles such as &#039;non-editing teacher&#039; may only have one or the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Altering the grades===&lt;br /&gt;
You can click &amp;quot;Turn editing on&amp;quot;  at the top right to show an edit icon next to each grade. Clicking on the icon will bring up the editing screen for that grade which will allow you to set the grade, its written feedback and a number of other attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can choose &amp;quot;Quick grading&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Quick feedback&amp;quot; in &#039;My preferences&#039; to make the report appear with editable boxes containing each grade, so you can change many at once.  This capability can be a real time saver, but make sure to save at reasonable intervals lest a pageful of changes be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you make changes here, they are then shown highlighted to indicate grades which have been manually changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Altering the grades using Single View===&lt;br /&gt;
There is a new way to enter grades into the grader report using the Single View tab (or listing in the dropdown) under Setup.  (This interface can also be accessed by clicking on the pencil icon at the top of the column by the item name).&lt;br /&gt;
The single view interface allows you to enter grades in bulk for a specific grade item or a specific user.  To change a specific grade or all grades, click on the Override checkbox by the specific grade row or use the Override All link to check every row.  If you wish to override all grades with a set grade, check the Bulk Insert checkbox and enter the grade that you wish to insert.  You can select whether to fill the grade for just empty grades or for all grades from the dropdown list.  &lt;br /&gt;
Click on Save and you will now see in the Grader Report that all grades the specific item/user have been overridden with the grade/grades that you entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hiding columns or individual grades===&lt;br /&gt;
Turning on editing then clicking the &amp;quot;Show show/hide icons&amp;quot; link will give you the familiar show/hide eye icon next to each grade and at the top of each column. For more information, read about [[Grade_hiding|grade hiding]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Recalculating===&lt;br /&gt;
If you change any part of an assessment e.g. alter the maximum grade for one of the questions in a quiz, you may find that the columns do not yet reflect the change you have made. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Turn editing on&#039;&#039;&#039; twice to force the gradebook to re-check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gradebook capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is just one gradebook capability, [[Capabilities/gradereport/grader:view|View the grader report]], which is allowed for the default roles of manager, teacher and non-editing teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Extending the gradebook==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Gradebook can be extended in three main ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1. [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=9 Grade reports]===&lt;br /&gt;
Which are the main way to view and manipulate grades&lt;br /&gt;
* [[LAEGrader report|LAE Grader Report]] Alternative to Grader report that scrolls vertically and horizontally without losing student columns or grade item header rows. Lot of additional enhancements.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=gradereport_updfgrades Upload PDF Grader Report] lets you view assignment grades, comments and lateness in a report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2. Grade import plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
Which allow data to be imported from external sources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3. [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=10 Grade export plugins]:===&lt;br /&gt;
Which allow you to export grade data for other systems&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=gradeexport_pdf PDF document] This is moodle plugin for exporting grades in PDF format. It is developed by using &amp;quot;Moodle PDF library&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=gradeexport_checklist Checklist] This is a grade export plugin which will create an Excel spreadsheet containing all the checkmarks from a single checklist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Join the discussions about gradebook plugins in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=2122 Gradebook forum].&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/CMXvtFPmd0o?list=PLxcO_MFWQBDdJmqW4tD5qXJ6pPXWTP7GL Gradebook 2.8 screencast]  from Moodle HQ&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/ShGv7lwMfm0 Greg Egan - Introduction to grading and the gradebook - iMoot 2013] Excellent clarification of Grader Report, Categories and Items, Scales, Aggregation (especially helpful for accurate overall grades!), Letter Grades, and Rubrics. Outcomes are not covered.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://youtu.be/lWcheVbQe2E The Moodle Gradebook]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bewertungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Libro de calificaciones]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Carnet de notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:評定表]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=121864</id>
		<title>Quiz settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=121864"/>
		<updated>2016-01-02T21:47:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ updating MoodleBites Quiz activity video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a new quiz is a two-step process. In the first step, you create the quiz activity and set its options which specify the rules for interacting with the quiz. In the second step you add questions to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
This page describes the options you can set for the quiz activity. The page [[Building Quiz]] describes how to set up the questions for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz administration==&lt;br /&gt;
When you first set up your quiz from &#039;&#039;Add an activity or resource &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;, (or, if you don&#039;t have this link, the dropdown &#039;&#039;Add an activity&amp;gt;Quiz&#039;&#039;) you will get the following settings, (which can also be changed later in the Edit Settings link of the Quiz administration settings block) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
Add a name here (which students will click on to access the quiz) and, if desired, a description of what they must do.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Timing==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can change quiz availability and duration for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block .}}&lt;br /&gt;
;Open the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:You can specify times when the quiz is accessible for people to make attempts. Before the opening time the quiz will be unavailable to students. They will be able to view the quiz introduction but will not be able to view the questions. Quizzes with start times in the future diasplay both the open and close date for students.&lt;br /&gt;
;Close the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:After the closing time, the students will not be able to start new attempts. Answers that the student submits after the quiz closing date will be saved but they will not be marked. &lt;br /&gt;
: Even after the quiz has closed students will still be able to see the quiz description and review their attempts. What exactly they will see depends on the settings you choose for review options (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
;Time limit&lt;br /&gt;
:By default, quizzes do not have a time limit, which allows students as much time as they need to complete the quiz. If you do specify a time limit, several things are done to try and ensure that quizzes are completed within that time:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quiz timer.png|thumb|Navigation block showing quiz timer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A countdown timer is shown in the quiz navigation block &lt;br /&gt;
# When the timer has run out, the quiz is submitted automatically with whatever answers have been filled in so far &lt;br /&gt;
# If a student manages to cheat and goes over the allotted time, no marks are awarded for any answers entered after the time ran out&lt;br /&gt;
;When time expires..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options as to what will happen when the time limit is up. Choose the one you need from the dropdown menu:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open attempts are submitted automatically (This is the default)&lt;br /&gt;
# There is a grace period when open attempts can be submitted, but no more questions answered&lt;br /&gt;
# Attempts must be submitted before time expires, or they are not counted&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;There is a grace period...&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then you can check the box to enable the &amp;quot;Submission grace period&amp;quot; and specify a period of time during which learners may still submit the quiz after the time is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples of how timing is handled===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#A student starts a quiz at noon. The quiz has a one-hour time-limit, and a 1 hour delay between attempts. The student gets distracted, and so actually does not submit (using the overdue handling) until 1:30pm. &#039;&#039;They are allowed to start their second attempt at 2. pm&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The quiz count-down timer submits a student&#039;s quiz attempt at the last second when time expires. Because the server is heavily loaded, it takes 30 seconds to process the student&#039;s attempt. &#039;&#039;The submission is accepted nonetheless.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Same situation as above but with a 120 second delay: &#039;&#039;The submission is rejected.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The delay is not because of server load but because the student found a way to cheat the timer. &#039;&#039;Moodle cannot know what causes a delay.The behaviour is controlled by the admin setting(quiz | graceperiodmin), 60 seconds by default.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#A student is a member of 3 groups,all of which have different override settings. Which limits will apply to this student? &#039;&#039;If there is any user-specific override, then that is used, and the group overrides for that setting are not used at all. Otherwise, if there are multiple group overrides, the most generous values are used (the earliest open date, the latest close date, the longest time limit, the most number of attempts, and the student can type any of the passwords).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
;Grade category&lt;br /&gt;
If you have categories in your gradebook, select the one you wish the quiz to be in here.&lt;br /&gt;
;Attempts allowed&lt;br /&gt;
:Students may be allowed to have multiple attempts at a quiz. This can help make the process of taking the quiz more of an educational activity rather than simply an assessment.  &lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can change the allowed number of attempts for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block.}}&lt;br /&gt;
;Grade to pass&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set a passing grade for the quiz. This may be connected with [[Activity completion]] and [[Conditional activities]] such that a student will not be able to access a follow up activity until they have passed the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
;Grading method&lt;br /&gt;
:When multiple attempts are allowed, there are different ways you can use the grades to calculate the student&#039;s final grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
* Highest grade - the final grade is the highest (best) grade in any attempt&lt;br /&gt;
* Average grade - the final grade is the average (simple mean) grade of all attempts&lt;br /&gt;
* First grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the first attempt (other attempts are ignored)&lt;br /&gt;
* Last grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the most recent attempt only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Layout==&lt;br /&gt;
;New page&lt;br /&gt;
:For longer quizzes it makes sense to stretch the quiz over several pages by limiting the number of questions per page. When adding questions to the quiz, page breaks will automatically be inserted according to the setting you choose here. However, you will also be able to move page breaks around by hand later on the editing page.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note that changing this setting has no effect on questions you have already added to the quiz&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. The setting will only apply to questions you add subsequently. To change the page breaks in an existing quiz, you need to go to the quiz editing screen, tick the &#039;Show page breaks&#039; checkbox, then use the repaginate control.&lt;br /&gt;
;Navigation method (available by clicking &#039;&#039;Show More&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose &#039;&#039;Sequential&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;Free&#039;&#039;, if you want to force the student to progress through the questions in order and not go back to a previous question or skip to a later one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question behaviour==&lt;br /&gt;
;How questions behave&lt;br /&gt;
:See [[Question behaviours]].&lt;br /&gt;
;Allow redo within an attempt (available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
:If using Interactive or Immediate feedback mode, enabling this setting means students can try a question again even if they have used up their allowed attempts. This is helpful if they wish to learn from the feedback given at the end of their attempts. They will be given a different question from the one they were working on previously if there are other questions available.  A student&#039;s grade for that question slot is based on the most recent question they have started.&lt;br /&gt;
;Each attempt builds on the last (available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple attempts are allowed and this setting is set to Yes, then each new attempt contains the results of the previous attempt. This allows the student on the new attempt to concentrate on just those questions that were answered incorrectly on the previous attempt. If this option is chosen then each attempt by a particular student uses the same questions in the same order, independent of randomization settings. To show a fresh quiz on every attempt, select No for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Review options==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizreview.png|thumb|600px|Review options expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section controls what information students will be shown when they review their past attempts at the quiz, and during the attempt in adaptive mode.  It is a matrix with check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The various pieces of information that can be controlled are:&lt;br /&gt;
; The attempt: Will show how the student responded to each question.&lt;br /&gt;
; Whether correct: Displays whether the students response to each question is correct or incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
; Marks:  Reveals the marks awarded to the student and the grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
; Specific feedback: Will show the feedback for the response to the answer as set when adding the question to the quiz. Each response to a question can have feedback for both correct and incorrect answers.&lt;br /&gt;
; General feedback: Displays the general feedback for the whole question as set when adding the question to the quiz. You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. &lt;br /&gt;
; Right answer:  Reveals the correct answer to each question, whether the student answered correctly or not (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
; Overall feedback: Displays feedback for the entire quiz as set in the quiz settings (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each of the above items, you can determine the timeframe when the students will see them:&lt;br /&gt;
; During the attempt : is only available when &#039;&#039;‘How questions behave’&#039;&#039; has been set to &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback’&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback with CBM’&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;‘Interactive with multiple tries’&#039;&#039;. If set to one of these options then a &#039;&#039;‘Check’&#039;&#039; button will appear below the answer and when clicked the student will submit that response and then receive immediate feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
; Immediately after the attempt : means within 2 minutes of the student clicking &amp;quot;submit all and finish&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
; Later, while the quiz is still open : means after 2 minutes, but before the close date (if the quiz does not have a close date, this phase never ends).&lt;br /&gt;
; After the quiz is closed : means what it says (you never get here for quizzes without a close date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Checking any of the boxes in the timeframe row, will reveal the test to the student. For example, to allow students to see their quiz immediately after taking it but not later, make sure none of the boxes in &amp;quot;Later&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;After&amp;quot; rows are checked.  The student will be able to see their grade but not get into the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Currently, the Answers display is a bit inconsistent between different question types. For example, the matching question type shows students which of their responses are correct, but does not tell them the right answer for the ones they got wrong. The short answer and multiple choices question types do tell the student what the correct answer is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the capability &#039;View hidden grades&#039; [[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewhidden|moodle/grade:viewhidden]] (typically teachers and administrators) are not affected by these settings and will always by able to review all information about a student&#039;s attempt at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your list of review options, you must have &#039;The attempt&#039; (the first option in the lists) selected  before you can enable the options to show &#039;Whether correct&#039;, &#039;Specific feedback&#039;, &#039;General feedback&#039;, and &#039;Right answer&#039;. If you choose not to let the students review the attempt, your only options are to display &#039;Marks&#039; and &#039;Overall feedback&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
;Show the user&#039;s picture&lt;br /&gt;
:It is now possible, when displaying the user&#039;s profile picture for proctoring purposes, to choose whether a large image or thumbnail will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
;Decimal places in grades&lt;br /&gt;
:This option determines how many digits will be shown after the decimal separator (see  [[dev:Translation_langconfig|langconfig]] ) when the grade is displayed. A setting of 0 for example means that the grades are displayed as integers. This setting is only used for the display of grades, not for the display or marking of answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Extra restrictions on attempts==&lt;br /&gt;
;Require password&lt;br /&gt;
:If you specify a password in here then participants must enter the same password before they are allowed to make an attempt on the quiz. This is useful to give only a selected group of students access to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
;Require network address&lt;br /&gt;
:You can restrict access for a quiz to particular subnets on the LAN or Internet by specifying a comma-separated list of partial or full IP address numbers. This is especially useful for a proctored (invigilated) quiz, where you want to be sure that only people in a certain room are able to access the quiz. For example: 192.168. , 231.54.211.0/20, 231.3.56.211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There are three types of numbers you can use (you can not use text based domain names like example.com): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Full IP addresses, such as 192.168.10.1 which will match a single computer (or proxy). &lt;br /&gt;
# Partial addresses, such as 192.168 which will match anything starting with those numbers. &lt;br /&gt;
# CIDR notation, such as 231.54.211.0/20 which allows you to specify more detailed subnets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Spaces are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Enforced delay between attempts&lt;br /&gt;
:You can set a time (from seconds to weeks) between the first and second attempt of a quiz. You can also (or alternatively) set a time from seconds to weeks for subsequent attempts after the second attempt. Thus, you might allow a student to take the quiz twice immediately with no delay, but if they want to improve their score with a third attempt, they are forced to wait a week and use the time for extra revision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Browser security&lt;br /&gt;
:This is by default an advanced field, visible by clicking &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:The options in this section offer various ways to try to restrict how students may try to &#039;cheat&#039; while attempting a quiz. However, this is not a simple issue, and what in one situation is considered &#039;cheating&#039; may, in another situation, just be effective use of information technology. (For example, the ability to quickly find answers using a search engine.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Note also that this is not just at problem of technology with a technical solution. Cheating has been going on since long before computers, and while computers make certain actions, like copy and paste, easier, they also make it easier for teachers to detect cheating - for example using the quiz reports. The options provided here are not fool-proof, and while they do make some forms of cheating harder for students, they also make it more inconvenient for students to attempt the quizzes, and they are not fool-proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Full screen pop-up with some JavaScript security&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There is a limit to what the quiz, which runs on a web server, can do to restrict what the student sitting at their computer can do while attempting the quiz. However, this option does what is possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz will only start if the student has a JavaScript-enabled web-browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz appears in a fullscreen popup window that covers all the other windows and has no  course navigation controls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:seb24.png|thumb|Student view of quiz question with full screen popup.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The students are prevented, as far as is possible, from using facilities like copy and paste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Require the use of Safe Exam Browser&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:This option will only appear if your administrator has enabled it in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safe exam browser|Safe Exam Browser]] is a customised web browser that must be downloaded and installed on the computer that the student uses to attempt the quiz. It restricts student use more effectively than a pop up window option.  Features include full screen, without web navigation options, shortcut keys including copy and paste are disabled and of course surfing the web during an exam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall feedback==&lt;br /&gt;
Overall feedback is shown to a student after they have completed an attempt at the quiz. The text that is shown can depend on the grade the student got. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 100%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 40%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then students who score between 100% and 40% will see the &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot; message, and those who score between 39.99% and 0% will see &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;. That is, the grade boundaries define ranges of grades, and each feedback string is displayed to scores within the appropriate range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grade boundaries can be specified either as a percentage, for example &amp;quot;31.41%&amp;quot;, or as a number, for example &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;. If your quiz is out of 10 marks, a grade boundary of 7 means 7/10 or better. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the maximum and minimum grade boundaries (100% and 0%) are set automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set as many or as few grade boundaries as you wish. The form allows you up to 5 ranges at first, but you can add more by clicking the &amp;quot;Add 3 fields to form&amp;quot; button underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re getting confusing error messages about a boundary being out of sequence (when it&#039;s obviously *in* sequence), or &amp;quot;boundaries must be between 0% and 100%&amp;quot; (and they are) -- check that the Maximum Grade for this quiz is set to something greater than zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Outcomes==&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will only appear if [[Outcomes]] have been enabled by the administrator and are used in the course. See [[Outcomes]] for how to remove an outcome once it has been added to a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz completion===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following automatic activity completion conditions apply to the quiz:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Require view&#039;&#039; - the student clicks on the quiz to view it&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Require grade&#039;&#039; - the student obtains a grade&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Require a passing grade&#039;&#039; - a &#039;Grade to pass&#039; is specified for the quiz in the gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;All available attempts completed&#039;&#039; - a certain number of attempts were allowed on the quiz and the student has completed them all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group and User overrides==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:overridesquiz.png|thumb|Location of overrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates, timing and number of allowed attempts may be changed for individual users or groups by following the links &#039;&#039;Group Overrides&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;User Overrides&#039;&#039; in the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular group, click the &amp;quot;add group override&amp;quot; button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;Group overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular user or users, click the &amp;quot;add user override&amp;quot;button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;User overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The time period settings for a quiz (such as time limit, submission grace period, autosave period and so on)  can be set here with a duration of seconds, minutes, hours, days or weeks. These defaults will then be used when new quizzes are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Autosave period&lt;br /&gt;
:If enabled, student responses will be saved at regular period according to the selection here. the default is one minute. This is useful so that students don&#039;t lose work but does increase the load on the server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How questions behave can be configured in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Question behaviours&amp;gt;Manage question &lt;br /&gt;
behaviours&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://youtu.be/y8HOnsKt6qg The Moodle Quiz Activity]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=116855</id>
		<title>Quiz settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=116855"/>
		<updated>2015-02-04T07:56:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Updating MoodleBites video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a new quiz is a two-step process. In the first step, you create the quiz activity and set its options which specify the rules for interacting with the quiz. In the second step you add questions to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
This page describes the options you can set for the quiz activity. The page [[Building Quiz]] describes how to set up the questions for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz administration==&lt;br /&gt;
When you first set up your quiz from &#039;&#039;Add an activity or resource &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;, (or, if you don&#039;t have this link, the dropdown &#039;&#039;Add an activity&amp;gt;Quiz&#039;&#039;) you will get the following settings, (which can also be changed later in the Edit Settings link of the Quiz administration settings block) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Quizgeneral.png|thumb|448px|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
;Name&lt;br /&gt;
:This is the standard name field. This name will appear on the home page of the course, navigation menu and other places which will show or provide links to this quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Description&lt;br /&gt;
:Describe the purpose of the glossary and provide instructions or background information, links etc. Click the icon top left to expand the toolbars, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&#039;&#039;&#039;Display description on course page&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:If ticked, the quiz description will appear on the course page directly under the quiz name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Timing==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quiztiming.png|thumb|452px|Timing settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Open the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:You can specify times when the quiz is accessible for people to make attempts. Before the opening time the quiz will be unavailable to students. They will be able to view the quiz introduction but will not be able to view the questions. Quizzes with start times in the future diasplay both the open and close date for students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can make the quiz available at different times for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Close the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:After the closing time, the students will not be able to start new attempts. Answers that the student submits after the quiz closing date will be saved but they will not be marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: Even after the quiz has closed students will still be able to see the quiz description and review their attempts. What exactly they will see depends on the settings you choose for review options (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
;Time limit&lt;br /&gt;
:By default, quizzes do not have a time limit, which allows students as much time as they need to complete the quiz. If you do specify a time limit, several things are done to try and ensure that quizzes are completed within that time:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quiz timer.png|thumb|Navigation block showing quiz timer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A countdown timer is shown in the quiz navigation block &lt;br /&gt;
# When the timer has run out, the quiz is submitted automatically with whatever answers have been filled in so far &lt;br /&gt;
# If a student manages to cheat and goes over the allotted time, no marks are awarded for any answers entered after the time ran out&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can make the quiz available last a different period of time for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;When time expires..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options as to what will happen when the time limit is up. Choose the one you need from the dropdown menu:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open attempts are submitted automatically (This is the default)&lt;br /&gt;
# There is a grace period when open attempts can be submitted, but no more questions answered&lt;br /&gt;
# Attempts must be submitted before time expires, or they are not counted&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;There is a grace period...&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then you can check the box to enable the &amp;quot;Submission grace period&amp;quot; and specify a period of time during which learners may still submit the quiz after the time is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples of how timing is handled===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#A student starts a quiz at noon. The quiz has a one-hour time-limit, and a 1 hour delay between attempts. The student gets distracted, and so actually does not submit (using the overdue handling) until 1:30pm. &#039;&#039;They are allowed to start their second attempt at 2. pm&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The quiz count-down timer submits a student&#039;s quiz attempt at the last second when time expires. Because the server is heavily loaded, it takes 30 seconds to process the student&#039;s attempt. &#039;&#039;The submission is accepted nonetheless.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Same situation as above but with a 120 second delay: &#039;&#039;The submission is rejected.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The delay is not because of server load but because the student found a way to cheat the timer. &#039;&#039;Moodle cannot know what causes a delay.The behaviour is controlled by the admin setting(quiz | graceperiodmin), 60 seconds by default.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#A student is a member of 3 groups,all of which have different override settings. Which limits will apply to this student? &#039;&#039;If there is any user-specific override, then that is used, and the group overrides for that setting are not used at all. Otherwise, if there are multiple group overrides, the most generous values are used (the earliest open date, the latest close date, the longest time limit, the most number of attempts, and the student can type any of the passwords).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizgrade.png|thumb|312px|Grade settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Grade category&lt;br /&gt;
If you have categories in your gradebook, select the one you wish the quiz to be in here.&lt;br /&gt;
;Attempts allowed&lt;br /&gt;
:Students may be allowed to have multiple attempts at a quiz. This can help make the process of taking the quiz more of an educational activity rather than simply an assessment. If the quiz is randomized then the student will get a new version for each attempt. This is useful for practice purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can change the allowed number of attempts for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Grading method&lt;br /&gt;
:When multiple attempts are allowed, there are different ways you can use the grades to calculate the student&#039;s final grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
* Highest grade - the final grade is the highest (best) grade in any attempt&lt;br /&gt;
* Average grade - the final grade is the average (simple mean) grade of all attempts&lt;br /&gt;
* First grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the first attempt (other attempts are ignored)&lt;br /&gt;
* Last grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the most recent attempt only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Layout==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizlayout.png|thumb|422px|Layout settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Question order&lt;br /&gt;
:If &#039;Shuffled randomly&#039; is selected, then the order of questions in the quiz will be randomly shuffled each time a student starts a new attempt at the quiz. The intention is to make it a little harder for students to copy from each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;New page&lt;br /&gt;
:For longer quizzes it makes sense to stretch the quiz over several pages by limiting the number of questions per page. When adding questions to the quiz, page breaks will automatically be inserted according to the setting you choose here. However, you will also be able to move page breaks around by hand later on the editing page.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Note that changing this setting has no effect on questions you have already added to the quiz&#039;&#039;&#039;. The setting will only apply to questions you add subsequently. To change the page breaks in an existing quiz, you need to go to the quiz editing screen, tick the &#039;Show page breaks&#039; checkbox, then use the repaginate control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Navigation method (available by clicking &#039;&#039;Show More&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By choosing &#039;&#039;Sequential&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;Free&#039;&#039;, the teacher is forcing the student to progress through the questions in order without being able to go back to a previous question or skip to a later one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question behaviour==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizquestionbehaviour.png|thumb|447px|Question behaviour settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
;Shuffle within questions&lt;br /&gt;
:If set to &#039;yes&#039;, then each time the student takes a quiz the parts of the question will be shuffled randomly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;How questions behave&lt;br /&gt;
:See [[Question behaviours]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Each attempt builds on the last (available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple attempts are allowed and this setting is set to Yes, then each new attempt contains the results of the previous attempt. This allows the student on the new attempt to concentrate on just those questions that were answered incorrectly on the previous attempt. If this option is chosen then each attempt by a particular student uses the same questions in the same order, independent of randomization settings. To show a fresh quiz on every attempt, select No for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Review options==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizreview.png|thumb|600px|Review options expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section controls what information students will be shown when they review their past attempts at the quiz, and during the attempt in adaptive mode.  It is a matrix with check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The various pieces of information that can be controlled are:&lt;br /&gt;
; The attempt: Will show how the student responded to each question.&lt;br /&gt;
; Whether correct: Displays whether the students response to each question is correct or incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
; Marks:  Reveals the marks awarded to the student and the grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
; Specific feedback: Will show the feedback for the response to the answer as set when adding the question to the quiz. Each response to a question can have feedback for both correct and incorrect answers.&lt;br /&gt;
; General feedback: Displays the general feedback for the whole question as set when adding the question to the quiz. You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. &lt;br /&gt;
; Right answer:  Reveals the correct answer to each question, whether the student answered correctly or not (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
; Overall feedback: Displays feedback for the entire quiz as set in the quiz settings (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each of the above items, you can determine the timeframe when the students will see them:&lt;br /&gt;
; During the attempt : is only available when &#039;&#039;‘How questions behave’&#039;&#039; has been set to &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback’&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback with CBM’&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;‘Interactive with multiple tries’&#039;&#039;. If set to one of these options then a &#039;&#039;‘Check’&#039;&#039; button will appear below the answer and when clicked the student will submit that response and then receive immediate feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
; Immediately after the attempt : means within 2 minutes of the student clicking &amp;quot;submit all and finish&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
; Later, while the quiz is still open : means after 2 minutes, but before the close date (if the quiz does not have a close date, this phase never ends).&lt;br /&gt;
; After the quiz is closed : means what it says (you never get here for quizzes without a close date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Checking any of the boxes in the timeframe row, will reveal the test to the student. For example, to allow students to see their quiz immediately after taking it but not later, make sure none of the boxes in &amp;quot;Later&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;After&amp;quot; rows are checked.  The student will be able to see their grade but not get into the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Currently, the Answers display is a bit inconsistent between different question types. For example, the matching question type shows students which of their responses are correct, but does not tell them the right answer for the ones they got wrong. The short answer and multiple choices question types do tell the student what the correct answer is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the capability &#039;View hidden grades&#039; [[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewhidden|moodle/grade:viewhidden]] (typically teachers and administrators) are not affected by these settings and will always by able to review all information about a student&#039;s attempt at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your list of review options, you must have &#039;The attempt&#039; (the first option in the lists) selected  before you can enable the options to show &#039;Whether correct&#039;, &#039;Specific feedback&#039;, &#039;General feedback&#039;, and &#039;Right answer&#039;. If you choose not to let the students review the attempt, your only options are to display &#039;Marks&#039; and &#039;Overall feedback&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizappearance.png|thumb|470px|Display settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Show the user&#039;s picture&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible, when displaying the user&#039;s profile picture for proctoring purposes, to choose whether a large image or thumbnail will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Decimal places in grades&lt;br /&gt;
:This option determines how many digits will be shown after the decimal separator (see  [[dev:Translation_langconfig|langconfig]] ) when the grade is displayed. A setting of 0 for example means that the grades are displayed as integers. This setting is only used for the display of grades, not for the display or marking of answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Extra restrictions on attempts==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default and are available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizextrarestrictions.png|thumb|470px|Extra restrictions settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Require password&lt;br /&gt;
:This field is optional. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If you specify a password in here then participants must enter the same password before they are allowed to make an attempt on the quiz. This is useful to give only a selected group of students access to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Require network address&lt;br /&gt;
:This field is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:You can restrict access for a quiz to particular subnets on the LAN or Internet by specifying a comma-separated list of partial or full IP address numbers. This is especially useful for a proctored (invigilated) quiz, where you want to be sure that only people in a certain room are able to access the quiz. For example: 192.168. , 231.54.211.0/20, 231.3.56.211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There are three types of numbers you can use (you can not use text based domain names like example.com): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Full IP addresses, such as 192.168.10.1 which will match a single computer (or proxy). &lt;br /&gt;
# Partial addresses, such as 192.168 which will match anything starting with those numbers. &lt;br /&gt;
# CIDR notation, such as 231.54.211.0/20 which allows you to specify more detailed subnets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Spaces are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Enforced delay between attempts&lt;br /&gt;
:These two  fields are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:You can set a time (from seconds to weeks) between the first and second attempt of a quiz. You can also (or alternatively) set a time from seconds to weeks for subsequent attempts after the second attempt. Thus, you might allow a student to take the quiz twice immediately with no delay, but if they want to improve their score with a third attempt, they are forced to wait a week and use the time for extra revision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Browser security&lt;br /&gt;
:This is by default an advanced field, visible by clicking &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:The options in this section offer various ways to try to restrict how students may try to &#039;cheat&#039; while attempting a quiz. However, this is not a simple issue, and what in one situation is considered &#039;cheating&#039; may, in another situation, just be effective use of information technology. (For example, the ability to quickly find answers using a search engine.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Note also that this is not just at problem of technology with a technical solution. Cheating has been going on since long before computers, and while computers make certain actions, like copy and paste, easier, they also make it easier for teachers to detect cheating - for example using the quiz reports. The options provided here are not fool-proof, and while they do make some forms of cheating harder for students, they also make it more inconvenient for students to attempt the quizzes, and they are not fool-proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Full screen pop-up with some JavaScript security&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There is a limit to what the quiz, which runs on a web server, can do to restrict what the student sitting at their computer can do while attempting the quiz. However, this option does what is possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz will only start if the student has a JavaScript-enabled web-browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz appears in a fullscreen popup window that covers all the other windows and has no  course navigation controls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:seb24.png|thumb|465px|Student view of quiz question with full screen popup. (Click to see enlarged)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
:* The students are prevented, as far as is possible, from using facilities like copy and paste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Require the use of Safe Exam Browser&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:This option will only appear if your administrator has enabled it in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safe exam browser|Safe Exam Browser]] is a customised web browser that must be downloaded and installed on the computer that the student uses to attempt the quiz. It restricts student use more effectively than a pop up window option.  Features include full screen, without web navigation options, shortcut keys including copy and paste are disabled and of course surfing the web during an exam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall feedback==&lt;br /&gt;
(These setttings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizoverallfeedback.png|thumb|448px|Overall feedback settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Overall feedback is shown to a student after they have completed an attempt at the quiz. The text that is shown can depend on the grade the student got. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 100%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 40%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then students who score between 100% and 40% will see the &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot; message, and those who score between 39.99% and 0% will see &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;. That is, the grade boundaries define ranges of grades, and each feedback string is displayed to scores within the appropriate range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grade boundaries can be specified either as a percentage, for example &amp;quot;31.41%&amp;quot;, or as a number, for example &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;. If your quiz is out of 10 marks, a grade boundary of 7 means 7/10 or better. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the maximum and minimum grade boundaries (100% and 0%) are set automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set as many or as few grade boundaries as you wish. The form allows you up to 5 ranges at first, but you can add more by clicking the &amp;quot;Add 3 fields to form&amp;quot; button underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re getting confusing error messages about a boundary being out of sequence (when it&#039;s obviously *in* sequence), or &amp;quot;boundaries must be between 0% and 100%&amp;quot; (and they are) -- check that the Maximum Grade for this quiz is set to something greater than zero.&lt;br /&gt;
==Outcomes==&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will only appear if [[Outcomes]] have been enabled by the administrator and are used in the course. See [[Outcomes]] for how to remove an outcome once it has been added to a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz completion===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following automatic activity completion conditions apply to the quiz:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Require view&#039;&#039; - the student clicks on the quiz to view it&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Require grade&#039;&#039; - the student obtains a grade&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizpassinggrade.png|thumb|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Require a passing grade&#039;&#039; - a &#039;Grade to pass&#039; is specified for the quiz in the gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;All available attempts completed&#039;&#039; - a certain number of attempts were allowed on the quiz and the student has completed them all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group and User overrides==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:overridesquiz.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates, timing and number of allowed attempts may be changed for individual users or groups by following the links &#039;&#039;Group Overrides&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;User Overrides&#039;&#039; in the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular group, click the &amp;quot;add group override&amp;quot; button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;Group overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular user or users, click the &amp;quot;add user override&amp;quot;button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;Group overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:groupuseroverride.png|groupuseroverride.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Autosave period&lt;br /&gt;
:If enabled, student responses will be saved every minute/two minutes/five minutes (according to selection) This is useful so that students don&#039;t lose work but does increase the load on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How questions behave can be configured in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Question behaviours&amp;gt;Manage question &lt;br /&gt;
behaviours&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/I87h6ijtjls The Moodle Quiz Activity]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_activity&amp;diff=116854</id>
		<title>Quiz activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_activity&amp;diff=116854"/>
		<updated>2015-02-04T07:55:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039; activity module allows the teacher to design and build quizzes consisting of a large variety of [[Question types]], including multiple choice, true-false, and short answer questions. These questions are kept in the [[Question bank]] and can be re-used in different quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Quizexample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Quizzes can be [[Quiz settings|configured]] to allow multiple attempts. Each attempt at a question is automatically marked, and the teacher can choose whether to give feedback and/or show the correct answers. &lt;br /&gt;
There are many ways to [[Using Quiz|use a quiz]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback about performance and self-assessment are important parts of a learning environment. There are several ways to give feedback to students: on each question or overall. The quiz module can display feedback and scores at different times during the quiz, using the review options in the [[Quiz settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A wide variety of [[Quiz reports]] (in addition to [[Grades]]) are available for use by the teacher. Quiz reports not only can focus on a single student&#039;s attempt to answer each question, but also can perform a robust item analysis of a question&#039;s validity based upon aggregated student responses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A single quiz can automatically select random and/or specific questions from different [[Question bank|categories]] of questions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are different options for [[Editing a quiz|scoring (marks-grades)]] individual questions in a specific quiz, [[Adding/updating_a_quiz#Grades_section|grading attempts]] for a quiz and each [[Question types|question type]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The quiz settings allow different [[Adding/updating_a_quiz#Display_section|display methods]]. They can randomize the questions for each student and or randomize the answers for each student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher can determine the number of questions on each page of questions the student sees.  The teacher can change the position of any question in the quiz. It is possible to put a label with information any place between questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher can [[Quiz settings|choose]] how questions behave during the quiz. It can be like a classic test, where the student gets no feedback while attempting the test, only later. Alternatively, Moodle can reveal the grades and/or feedback to the student during the quiz, and perhaps even give them another chance to answer the question (for fewer marks) having read the feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about list only mentions a few features of the quiz module and how it works with the question bank. Please follow the links on this page to learn more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Quiz Quiz] developer&#039;s documentation&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sfGlV5WaZE8 Quiz in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/Word_table_format Microsoft Word table format add-on]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/I87h6ijtjls The Moodle Quiz Activity]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/YQEx0PxRb4c Creating Quiz Questions (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/FGIh-5CYwzs Creating Quiz Questions (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/BRDbe7JcCBw Creating Quiz Questions (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/course/view.php?id=1581 eAssessment with Moodle] by the Open University, which showcases the features of the Moodle Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Módulo de examen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdetegiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:小テストモジュール]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:Тест]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Quizy]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:測驗卷]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Installing_a_new_theme&amp;diff=116764</id>
		<title>Installing a new theme</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Installing_a_new_theme&amp;diff=116764"/>
		<updated>2015-01-24T08:48:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Themes}}&lt;br /&gt;
A new theme can be installed in the same way as any other plugin. Please see [[Installing plugins]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing the theme==&lt;br /&gt;
You may select different themes depending upon the device that will be viewing Moodle.  For example, you might have one theme for computers with monitors and another for mobile phones and another for tablets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in as admin and go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme Selector&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Clear theme caches&amp;quot; button &lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &amp;quot;Select theme&amp;quot; button on the right of the current theme being used for the device&lt;br /&gt;
# Scroll down to find the theme you wish to use&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Use theme&amp;quot; button next to that theme&lt;br /&gt;
# Moodle will tell you it has been saved as the default theme&lt;br /&gt;
# Check your Moodle site by going to the Moodle site&#039;s home page  &lt;br /&gt;
# You may have to refresh your browser to see the new theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:instheme07.png|thumb|Open the Appearance &amp;gt; Theme selector page]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:instheme09.png|thumb|Click the Select theme button]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:instheme10.png|thumb|Click the Use theme button]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:instheme11.png|thumb|Checking if the theme is the one selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/K3MYE8am7M4 Install a New Theme]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ein_neues_Design_installieren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Themes&amp;diff=116763</id>
		<title>Themes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Themes&amp;diff=116763"/>
		<updated>2015-01-24T08:47:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Site appearance}}&lt;br /&gt;
Themes provide a &amp;quot;skin&amp;quot; to completely change the look and feel of your site (or even an individual course).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Theme settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Standard themes]] including information on changing your theme&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Installing a new theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Themes FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Theme credits]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[:dev:Themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.slideshare.net/ghenrick/a-look-at-moodle-2-themes Themes white paper] by Gavin Henrick&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/K3MYE8am7M4 Install a New Theme]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Temas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Itxurak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Designs]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Thèmes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:テーマ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Installing_a_new_theme&amp;diff=116762</id>
		<title>Installing a new theme</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Installing_a_new_theme&amp;diff=116762"/>
		<updated>2015-01-24T08:47:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Themes}}&lt;br /&gt;
A new theme can be installed in the same way as any other plugin. Please see [[Installing plugins]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing the theme==&lt;br /&gt;
You may select different themes depending upon the device that will be viewing Moodle.  For example, you might have one theme for computers with monitors and another for mobile phones and another for tablets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Log in as admin and go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme Selector&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;quot;Clear theme caches&amp;quot; button &lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &amp;quot;Select theme&amp;quot; button on the right of the current theme being used for the device&lt;br /&gt;
# Scroll down to find the theme you wish to use&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Use theme&amp;quot; button next to that theme&lt;br /&gt;
# Moodle will tell you it has been saved as the default theme&lt;br /&gt;
# Check your Moodle site by going to the Moodle site&#039;s home page  &lt;br /&gt;
# You may have to refresh your browser to see the new theme&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/K3MYE8am7M4 Install a New Theme]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:instheme07.png|thumb|Open the Appearance &amp;gt; Theme selector page]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:instheme09.png|thumb|Click the Select theme button]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:instheme10.png|thumb|Click the Use theme button]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:instheme11.png|thumb|Checking if the theme is the one selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ein_neues_Design_installieren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Installing_plugins&amp;diff=116761</id>
		<title>Installing plugins</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Installing_plugins&amp;diff=116761"/>
		<updated>2015-01-24T08:42:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MBites video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Installing Moodle}}&lt;br /&gt;
Plugins enable you to add additional features and functionality to Moodle, such as new activities, new quiz question types, new reports, integrations with other systems and many more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Considerations for production sites (skip if you&#039;re just moodling) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VERY IMPORTANT&#039;&#039;&#039; Warning: Please be aware that some plugins have not been reviewed, and the quality and/or suitability for your Moodle site has not been checked. Please be careful. It may not do what you expect, it may have serious security issues or it may even not work at all. This is however improving over time with the evolving new plugins directory system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a large site for production purposes consider if you &#039;&#039;&#039;really&#039;&#039;&#039; need the plugin? More functionality means more things to support, more things to (potentially) go wrong and more things to worry about at upgrade time. &lt;br /&gt;
* Is the plugin supported and maintained? If something goes wrong can you get support? Will bugs be fixed?&lt;br /&gt;
* If the plugin does not work in a future version of Moodle, what will you do about it?&lt;br /&gt;
* Beware of &#039;&#039;patches&#039;&#039; ([https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=38 Moodle Plugins Directory Other category]) ! If a plugin modifies or replaces core files then be very careful. It can only be guaranteed to work with the exact build (version) of Moodle it was created for and is highly unlikely to survive a Moodle upgrade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing a plugin==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install a plugin, its source code must be put (deployed) into the appropriate location inside the Moodle installation directory and the main administration page &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039; must be visited. There are three ways how the plugin code can be deployed into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plugin code may be deployed from within Moodle, either directly from the Moodle plugins directory or by uploading a ZIP file. The web server process has to have write access to the plugin type folder where the new plugin is to be installed in order to use either of these methods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, a plugin may be deployed manually at the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installing directly from the Moodle plugins directory===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Login as an admin and go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Install plugins&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Install plugins from Moodle plugins directory&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Search for a plugin with an Install button, click the Install button then click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check that you obtain a &#039;Validation passed!&#039; message, then click the button &#039;Install plugin&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installing via uploaded ZIP file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the [https://moodle.org/plugins Moodle plugins directory], select your current Moodle version, then choose a plugin with a Download button and download the ZIP file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Login to your Moodle site as an admin and go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Install plugins&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the ZIP file, select the appropriate plugin type, tick the acknowledgement checkbox, then click the button &#039;Install plugin from the ZIP file&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check that you obtain a &#039;Validation passed!&#039; message, then click the button &#039;Install plugin&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:install add-ons.png|thumb|Install plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:add-on package validation.png|thumb|Plugin package validation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For both of the above methods, after clicking the button &#039;Install plugin&#039;, you will then be automatically redirected to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039; and the installation process (i.e. creating required database tables etc) will happen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installing manually at the server===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you can&#039;t deploy the plugin code via the administration web interface, you have to copy it to the server file system manually (e.g. if the web server process does not have write access to the Moodle installation tree to do this for you).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, establish the correct place in the Moodle code tree for the plugin type. Common locations are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/theme/ - themes&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/mod/ - activity modules and resources&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/blocks/ - sidebar blocks&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/question/type/ - question types&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/course/format/ - course formats&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/admin/report/ - admin reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[:dev:Plugins]] for the full list of all plugin types and their locations within the Moodle tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the [https://moodle.org/plugins Moodle plugins directory; select your current Moodle version, then choose a plugin with a Download button and download the ZIP file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload or copy it to your Moodle server.&lt;br /&gt;
# Unzip it in the right place for the plugin type (or follow the plugin instructions). &lt;br /&gt;
# In your Moodle site (as admin) go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039; (you should, for most plugin types, get a message saying the plugin is installed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The plugin may contain language files.  They&#039;ll be found by your Moodle automatically. These language strings can be customized using the standard &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Language&#039;&#039; editing interface. If you get a &amp;quot;Database error&amp;quot; when you try to edit your language files, there is a strong chance that the language files included within the downloaded ZIP file of this plugin have a coding problem. If you delete the &#039;&#039;plugin_name/lang/other_language_different_to_English/&#039;&#039; folder with the new language strings and the database error disappears, this is indeed the case. Please notify the plugin maintainer, so that it can be fixed in future releases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Errors===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you obtain an error, please [[Debugging|turn debugging on]] to obtain additional information about the cause of the error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;tool_installaddon/err_curl_exec - cURL error 60 : This suggests problems with the validation of the SSL certificate of the remote (moodle.org) site. This is also a known problem in Moodle Windows 7 servers running the Moodle package for Windows. See [[SSL certificate for moodle.org]] for more info and possible solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A file permissions error has occurred===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A common error after installing plugins is that when you create an instance of the module and then save and display it, it reports the error, &amp;quot;A file permissions error has occurred. Please check the permissions on the script and the directory it is in and try again.&amp;quot; If you get this, the file permissions of the package are mostl likely set to 711 preventing them from running correctly. With your preferred FTP client or via your web hosts control panel, set the file permissions of all the files and directories in the installed module, e.g. /moodle/mod/[myplugin]/ to 755 and then see if you can successfully view the module instance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===When installing manually===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check the file permissions. The web server needs to be able to read the plugin files. If the the rest of Moodle works then try to make the plugin permissions and ownership match. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did you &#039;&#039;&#039;definitely&#039;&#039;&#039; unzip or install the plugin in the correct place?&lt;br /&gt;
* Because Moodle scans plugin folders for new plugins you cannot have any other files or folders there. Make sure you deleted the zip file and don&#039;t try to rename (for example) an old version of the plugin to some other name - it will break.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the directory name for the plugin is correct. All the names &#039;&#039;&#039;have&#039;&#039;&#039; to match. If you change the name then it won&#039;t work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Obtaining help===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ask in the appropriate forum in [http://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=5 Using Moodle]. Make sure you describe your system (including versions of MySQL, PHP etc.), what you tried and what happened. Copy and paste error messages exactly. Provide the link to the version of the plugin you downloaded (some have very similar names).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Uninstalling a plugin==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To uninstall a plugin&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Plugins overview&#039;&#039; and click the Uninstall link opposite the plugin you wish to remove&lt;br /&gt;
# Use a file manager to remove/delete the actual plugin directory as instructed, otherwise Moodle will reinstall it next time you access the site administration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Plugins overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:plugins overview.png|thumb|center|400px|Plugins overview highlighting available check button]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Plugins overview page in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Plugins overview&#039;&#039; lists all installed plugins, together with the version number,release &#039;&#039;(new in 2.7)&#039;&#039;, availability (enabled or disabled) and settings link (if applicable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;Check for available updates&#039; button enables admins to quickly check for any updates available for plugins installed on the site (from the [http://moodle.org/plugins plugins directory]). Any updates available are highlighted, with further information and a download link in the notes column opposite the plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Plugin updating from within Moodle===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can enable updates deployment in  &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Update notifications&#039;&#039;. Then when updates are available, &#039;Install this update&#039; buttons are shown on the Plugins overview page. See [[Automatic updates deployment]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing installing plugins from within Moodle==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If required, installing and updating from within Moodle can be prevented by copying the following lines of code from config-dist.php and pasting them in config.php.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Use the following flag to completely disable the On-click plugin installation&lt;br /&gt;
 // feature and hide it from the server administration UI.&lt;br /&gt;
 //&lt;br /&gt;
 //      $CFG-&amp;gt;disableonclickaddoninstall = true;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Notifications]] for further details of update notifications&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Plugin Review Criteria]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Plugins FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Moodle in English [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=44 General plugins forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing Moodle from Git repository#Installing a contributed extension from its Git repository|Installing a contributed extension from its Git repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2013/05/07/managing-add-ons-in-moodle-2-5/ Managing add-ons in Moodle 2.5] blog post by Gavin Henrick&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/RxlmVzIllVk Moodle 2 Plugins Administration]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/K3MYE8am7M4 Install a New Theme]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For developers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:Category:Plugins|Plugins developer documentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:Plugin validation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:On-click add-on installation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Plugins installieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Instalar complementos]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=116716</id>
		<title>Theme settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=116716"/>
		<updated>2015-01-19T04:28:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Themes}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can change theme settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Themesettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme list===&lt;br /&gt;
This lists the themes available for course and user themes. Leave this blank to allow any valid theme to be used. If you want to shorten the theme menu, you may specify a comma-separated list of names, though don&#039;t use spaces (e.g. standard,orangewhite).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can  preview the available themes in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Themes selector.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme designer mode===&lt;br /&gt;
Turn this on if you are designing and testing themes as it will stop the themes being cached and enable you to see theme changes quickly. (You can also do this with the Clear theme cache button on the theme selector page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow user themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If the option &#039;&#039;allowuserthemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each user may select their preferred theme on the edit profile page. All Moodle pages will be displayed in the user&#039;s theme, apart from courses where a course theme has been set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; the user&#039;s theme will not be available in mobile and tablet devices unless the option &#039;&#039;enabledevicedetection&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow course themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If you enable this, then teachers will be able to set their own course themes. Course themes override all other theme choices (site, user, or session themes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If the option &#039;&#039;allowcoursethemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each editing teacher may select their course theme via the Force theme option on the [[course/edit|Course settings]] page. The course will always be displayed in the theme specified in the course setting, with user and the site themes being overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; the course theme will not be available in mobile and tablet devices unless the option &#039;&#039;enabledevicedetection&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow category themes===&lt;br /&gt;
When enabled, themes can be set at the category level. This will affect all child categories and courses unless they have specifically set their own theme. WARNING: Enabling category themes may affect performance, as it will result in a few extra DB queries on each page, so only turn this on if you need it!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; the category theme will not be available in mobile and tablet devices unless the option &#039;&#039;enabledevicedetection&#039;&#039; is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow theme changes in the URL===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If this is checked then the theme may be changed by adding &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if there are other URL parameters) to the URL in the browser. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Theme names used as the URL parameter should be the shortname of the theme, which you can see in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Plugins overview&#039;&#039; and scroll down to the Themes section near the bottom. Remove the &amp;quot;theme_&amp;quot; prefix to find the proper shortname. Theme shortnames are usually the same as the main theme name, eg. Clean is &#039;clean&#039;, so your URL parameter for it will be: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=clean&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Shortnames are always lower case. Themes with multiple words are usually the same but spaces are replaced by underscores, for example the theme &amp;quot;Formal white&amp;quot; should be entered as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=formal_white&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:themeshortnames.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; You can turn this on to aid in troubleshooting problems that may be theme related. This will allow you to switch to a standard or different theme for your own session without affecting other users or the site theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow users to hide blocks===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to display and hide blocks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow blocks to use the docks===&lt;br /&gt;
*If the theme allows it, then checking this will allow the user to move blocks to the side dock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom menu items===&lt;br /&gt;
The custommenuitems setting allows you to create a drop down menu that can be displayed by themes that support it. Currently all themes that are provided with Moodle 2.0 support this custom menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to create the custom menu by entering custom menu items one per line into the setting. Each item is preceded by a number of hyphens (-), the number of hyphens determines the depth of the item. So items that are &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; preceded by a hyphen appear on the top level of the menu (always visible), items with a single hyphen appear on a drop down menu below the previous top level item, and  items with two hyphens appear on a drop down menu below the previous first level item and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of each item is constructed of up to three bits, each separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;|&#039;&#039;&#039; (Shift + \) character. The bits are &#039;&#039;&#039;label&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;url&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;tooltip&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; label : This is the text that will be shown within the menu item. You must specify a label for every item on the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
; url : This is the URL that the user will be taken to it they click the menu item. This is optional, if not provided then the item will not link anywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
; tooltip : If you provide a URL you can also choose to provide a tooltip for the link that is created with the URL. This is optional and if not set the label is used as the tooltip for the menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is an example of how you would create a custom menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle community|http://moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle free support|http://moodle.org/support&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle development|http://moodle.org/development&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Tracker|http://tracker.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Docs|https://docs.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle News|http://moodle.org/news&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle company&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial hosting|http://moodle.com/hosting&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial support|http://moodle.com/support&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The custom menu does not escape characters within the label, if you want to use a special HTML character such as an ampersand you must escape it yourself within the label. e.g. use &amp;amp;amp; instead of &amp;amp;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on this setting please see the &#039;&#039;Using Moodle&#039;&#039; forum discussion [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=149803 Moodle 2.0: Custom menu in core]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====User menu items====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The admin may  configure  the contents of the user menu here. (Note that the log out  link is always present.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Although it is possible with the custom menu items above to use ### characters as dividers, these should NOT be used in the user menu as this will currently break your Moodle site. See MDL-48542 for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:customusermenu.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add an item you can use three elements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# a plain text description or a string in &amp;quot;langstringname, componentname&amp;quot; form &lt;br /&gt;
# the URL of the page you want to direct to&lt;br /&gt;
# an icon (if desired) This can be either the pix icon or the URL of an uploaded icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you wish to add an &#039;Edit profile&#039; link, add&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 editmyprofile,core|/user/edit.php|edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multilanguage support ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a language code (or a comma separated list of codes) as the 4th item of the line. The line will be then printed if and only if the user has currently selected the listed language. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 English only|http://moodle.com|English only item|en&lt;br /&gt;
 German only|http://moodle.de|Deutsch|de,de_du,de_kids&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding other attributes to the HTML ====&lt;br /&gt;
Other attributes, such as &#039;&#039;&#039;target&#039;&#039;&#039; can be added:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Moodle Homepage|http://moodle.org&amp;quot; target=&amp;quot;_blank&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first quote closes the href attribute, allowing other attributes to be added. Do not add the closing quotation mark on the final attribute, it is added automatically by Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable device detection===&lt;br /&gt;
Will detect mobile and tablets that identify themselves via the web browser at the time of login to Moodle.   These work with the theme selector.  When the theme selector has identified a default, mobile and tablet themes, this feature will use that theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Device detection regular expressions===&lt;br /&gt;
This will allow you to customize the theme selector options.   For example, you can add a custom theme for IE6 and another for Windows CE by entering the identifying expressions the browser sends and the &amp;quot;Return value&amp;quot; you want to display as the theme selectors &amp;quot;Device type&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special themes==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Session themes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle offers an additional way to set a theme - the &#039;&#039;&#039;session theme&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is set with the URL and lasts until you log out. When you next login, the site/course/user themes are active again. This option is great for theme testing and works perfectly when you want to enable different themes for different situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example you can offer a special link for PDA users and integrate the session theme &#039;&#039;orangewhitepda&#039;&#039; in that link. Nobody needs to change any settings, you just click on that link. The session theme is called by the URL parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The whole URL  without the session theme could look like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and with the parameter for the PDA theme like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a standard Moodle installation, session themes are not active. To activate them the administrator must add the parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;allowthemechangeonurl = true;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to the Moodle &#039;&#039;config.php&#039;&#039; file in the Moodle base directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Page theme ===&lt;br /&gt;
A page theme is for special page-only themes set by code, use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$PAGE-&amp;gt;force_theme()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme hierarchy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the usual order that themes are considered by the Moodle interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border:1px dashed #ddd&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;text-align:left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Theme type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Overwrites&lt;br /&gt;
!Display&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Setting type&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Site&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;| - &lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in theme profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|User&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site theme&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in user profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site, user and session themes&lt;br /&gt;
|one course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in course profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Session&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site and user themes&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|temporary until logout&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
(* except courses with the course theme set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Change default  hierarchy===&lt;br /&gt;
The priority of themes can be set via the /moodle/config.php file. The order defines which theme wins when there are several set at different levels. You can set a variable called $CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder (see config-dist.php for more details). By default it is set to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder = array(&#039;course&#039;, &#039;category&#039;, &#039;session&#039;, &#039;user&#039;, &#039;site&#039;);&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Particular theme settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logo, tagline, link colour, column width, custom CSS and other settings for a particular theme may be set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme name&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/QfhANg1MAZ0 Moodle Theme Settings Page]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuración de temas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages des thèmes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:テーマ設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Design-Einstellungen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=User_profiles&amp;diff=115006</id>
		<title>User profiles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=User_profiles&amp;diff=115006"/>
		<updated>2014-09-21T04:55:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Site appearance}}&lt;br /&gt;
A user&#039;s profile may be viewed by clicking on their name. See [[View profile]] for more information on how the profile information is displayed and [[Edit profile]] for information on updating profiles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Site policies===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can force users to login for profiles and select which roles are visible in user profiles (by default teacher, non-editing teacher and student) in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default profile page===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator or manager (or any other user with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/user:managesyspages|moodle/user:managesyspages]]) can set which blocks appear on the default profile page for new users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Access &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Default profile page&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the required blocks from the &amp;quot;Add a block&amp;quot; drop-down menu. Configure each block as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
# Reposition blocks using the arrow icons in the block headers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a block to all profile pages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can add a new block to all profile pages as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on for the front page&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the block to the front page&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit where the block appears and set the page contexts to &#039;Display throughout the entire site&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your profile page and again edit where the block appears and set &#039;Display on page types&#039; to &#039;Only user profile pages&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing users from customizing their profile page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, users can customize their public profile page and add blocks. To prevent this&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the authenticated user role and untick the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/user:manageownblocks|moodle/user:manageownblocks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User profile capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
System:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/user:editownprofile|Edit own user profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/user:manageownblocks|Manage blocks on own public user profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/user:managesyspages|Configure default page layout for public user profiles]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/user:update|Update user profiles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/user:editprofile|Edit user profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/user:manageblocks|Manage blocks on user profile of other users]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/user:viewalldetails|View user full information]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/user:viewdetails|View user profiles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[My profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[View profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[User profile fields]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Site policies]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Update profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/Q3cHQBgp-nA My Profile Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Nutzerprofil]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Perfiles de usuario]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Managing_a_Moodle_course&amp;diff=115005</id>
		<title>Managing a Moodle course</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Managing_a_Moodle_course&amp;diff=115005"/>
		<updated>2014-09-21T04:54:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Main page}}&lt;br /&gt;
A&#039;&#039; course&#039;&#039; in Moodle is an area where a teacher will add [[Resources|resources]] and [[Activities|activities]] for their students to complete.It might be a simple page with downloadable documents or it might be a complex set of tasks where learning progresses through interaction. Progress can be  [[Tracking progress|tracked]] in a number of ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The course page is made up of central sections which contain the tasks and (if desired) [[Block|blocks]] to the side. The course teacher has control over the layout of the [[Course homepage|course homepage]] and can change it at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students can be [[Course enrolment|enrolled]] manually by the teacher, automatically by the administrator, or they can be  allowed to enrol themselves. Students can also be added to [[Grouping users|groups]] if they need to be separated from  classes sharing the same course or if tasks need to be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Courses]]  - how to set up your courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Editing text]] - how to use the text editor and what the icons mean.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Activities]] - how to involve students actively in their learning.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Resources]] - how to add static materials to your course.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blocks]] - how to add extra items and information to the sides of your course page.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Questions]] - how to create  questions for use in [[Quiz|quizzes]] and Moodle&#039;s [[Lesson|lesson module]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Course enrolment]] - how to give students access to your course.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Grouping users]]  - how to put students into groups and why this is useful.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Grades]] - how to use the gradebook, scales and advanced grading methods.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tracking progress]] - how to control and display progress through a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Reusing activities]] - how to copy or recycle elements of your course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===See Also===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/lOxTQJfTnvs Course Administration Block] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Moodle-Kurs verwalten]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Gestionando un curso Moodle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Administration_block&amp;diff=115004</id>
		<title>Administration block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Administration_block&amp;diff=115004"/>
		<updated>2014-09-21T04:54:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding/Updating MoodleBites videos&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Blocks}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Administration block provides context-sensitive links to settings pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What appears in the Administration block depends upon the [[Context]] (Page being shown and user&#039;s permissions). For example, a site administrator on the front page will have Front page settings while a teacher in a course will have more options in Course administration than a student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are examples of the Administration block:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Image:25frontpageadmin.png|Admin view from Front page (collapsed) &lt;br /&gt;
Image:25teacheradmin.png|Teacher view in a course (expanded)&lt;br /&gt;
Image:25studentadmin.png|Student view in a course (collapsed)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Administration block menus===&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu items (Front page settings, Course Administration, My profile settings and Site Administration) contain a submenu and can be collapsed or expanded to display the (typical) full menu as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Front_page_settings_block|Front page settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
**Turn edit on/off&lt;br /&gt;
**Edit settings&lt;br /&gt;
**Users&lt;br /&gt;
**Filters&lt;br /&gt;
**Backup&lt;br /&gt;
**Restore&lt;br /&gt;
**Questions&lt;br /&gt;
**Files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Managing a Moodle course|Course administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
**Turn editing on&lt;br /&gt;
**Edit settings&lt;br /&gt;
**Users&lt;br /&gt;
**Filters&lt;br /&gt;
**Reports&lt;br /&gt;
**Grades&lt;br /&gt;
**Badges (if enabled)&lt;br /&gt;
**Backup&lt;br /&gt;
**Restore&lt;br /&gt;
**Import&lt;br /&gt;
**Publish&lt;br /&gt;
**Reset&lt;br /&gt;
**Question bank&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Profile |My profile settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
**Edit profile&lt;br /&gt;
**Change password&lt;br /&gt;
**Roles&lt;br /&gt;
**Portfolios (if available at site level)&lt;br /&gt;
**Security keys&lt;br /&gt;
**Messaging&lt;br /&gt;
**Blogs&lt;br /&gt;
**Make this my default home page (if set at site level)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Site_administration|Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
**Notifications&lt;br /&gt;
**Registration&lt;br /&gt;
**Advanced features&lt;br /&gt;
**Users&lt;br /&gt;
**Courses&lt;br /&gt;
**Grades&lt;br /&gt;
**Badges&lt;br /&gt;
**Location&lt;br /&gt;
**Language&lt;br /&gt;
**Plugins&lt;br /&gt;
**Security&lt;br /&gt;
**Appearance&lt;br /&gt;
**Front page&lt;br /&gt;
**Server&lt;br /&gt;
**Reports&lt;br /&gt;
**Development&lt;br /&gt;
**Question engine upgrade helper&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===See also===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/lOxTQJfTnvs Course Administration Block] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/Q3cHQBgp-nA My Profile Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einstellungen-Block]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Bloque de administración]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ezarpenak_blokea]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Folder_resource_settings&amp;diff=114847</id>
		<title>Folder resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Folder_resource_settings&amp;diff=114847"/>
		<updated>2014-09-13T05:11:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ updating MoodleBites video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Folder}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a folder to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Folders you wish to upload to Moodle have to be &amp;quot;zipped&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;compressed&amp;quot; first. The way you do this depends on your computer and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a folder of files you would like to display, there are two methods:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick method====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag and drop the folder onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button of the action you would like to take with the folder (in our case, &amp;quot;Unzip&amp;quot;) and click &amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#If necessary, edit the title of the folder by clicking the pencil icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folderdragging.png|thumb|2. Drag and drop folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folderaction.png|thumb|3. Uploading the folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Longer method====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link, then in the activity chooser; select folder then click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button (or select folder from the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; dropdown menu) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:foldergeneral.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:foldercontent.png|thumb|Content settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For&#039;&#039;&#039; General&#039;&#039;&#039;, add  name and a description (which may be required or optional according to the admin settings)Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it. Enabling &#039;Display description on course page&#039; will show it just below the link to the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
# For &#039;&#039;&#039;Content,&#039;&#039;&#039; either drag and drop a zipped/compressed folder into the box with an arrow or click the Add button to open the [[File picker]] menu in order to choose a file from your computer or a repository.&lt;br /&gt;
#When the folder thumbnail appears, click on it and select &amp;quot;Unzip&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:newfolderupload.png|thumb|Unzipping a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the original (zipped) folder and click the &amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot; button to delete it if you wish&lt;br /&gt;
#Select how you want to [[#Display folder contents |display your folder contents]], your [[Common module settings]] and, if enabled, [[Conditional activities settings]] and [[Activity completion]] and click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &#039;Save and return to course&#039; at the bottom of the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and uploading to a new folder==&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method if  you want to create a folder on your Moodle course and then upload files into it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link, then in the activity chooser; select folder then click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button (or select folder from the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; dropdown menu)&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a name and a description (which may be required or optional according to the admin settings)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Create folder&amp;quot; link as below; choose a name for your new folder and then click &amp;quot;Create folder&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click INTO the folder&lt;br /&gt;
# You can then add individual files into the folder either by dragging and dropping into the box (1 below) or clicking the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; (2 below) to upload files from  the [[File picker]] &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose how you want to display your folder contents, your [[Common module settings]] and, if enabled, [[Conditional activities settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:createfolder.png|thumb|4. Creating a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:addtofolder.png|thumb|6. Adding files to a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Display folder contents==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decide here whether to have the folder displayed on a separate page (the default) or inline with or without subfolders expanded or collapsed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folder1.png|thumb|Folder displayed on separate page]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folder2.png|thumb|Folder displayed inline]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folder3.png|thumb|Folder displayed inline with subfolders expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.5.2 onwards, all folder names are shown on the course page. (Previously the name was not displayed for folders displayed inline.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Folder capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/folder:view|View folder content]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/folder:managefiles|Manage files in folder module]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/folder:addinstance|Add new folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The folder module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Folder&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/MQpV4WUxigk The Moodle Folder Resource] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/ZPaVskLCRb4 Moodle 2 file management]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Verzeichnis konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del recurso carpeta]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=URL_resource_settings&amp;diff=114294</id>
		<title>URL resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=URL_resource_settings&amp;diff=114294"/>
		<updated>2014-08-25T00:01:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See Also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{URL}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a URL resource to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu),choose URL. All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all/Collapse all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:urlgeneral25.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the URL so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your page here. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Either enter the URL in the external URL field or click the &amp;quot;Choose a link&amp;quot; button to open the file picker and choose a URL YouTube, Picasa etc (depending on which [[Repositories|repositories]] are enabled for the site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:urlappearance.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039; - Make the best guess at what should happen (probably what is wanted 99% of the time).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Embed&#039;&#039; - Show the Moodle page with heading, blocks and footer. Show the title/description of the item and display the file directly in the page as well&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039; - No Moodle heading, blocks, footer or description - just show the file in the web browser (e.g. shows image, PDF, flash animation, taking up the whole browser window)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In pop-up&#039;&#039; - Same as &#039;Open&#039;, but opens a new browser window to show this file (without the Moodle heading, blocks, etc) - this browser window also does not have all the menus and address bar in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above options are the default display options. Additional display options (see below) may be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; URL&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Pop-up width/height===&lt;br /&gt;
If your URL is to be displayed in a pop-up, specify the width and height here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display URL name/description===&lt;br /&gt;
To show the resource name and/or description when clicking to access the URL, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==URL variables==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:url.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to pass internal information as part of the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful if the URL is actually an interactive web page that takes parameters, and you want to pass something like the name of the current user, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drag and Drop a URL==&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, if an administrator has enabled the experimental feature drag and drop upload of text/links in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; [[Experimental settings]]&#039;&#039;, a link can be dragged into a section of the course and given a name, as shown in the images below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:dragURL.png|thumb|Adding a URL using drag and drop]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==URL module capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/url:view|View URL resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/url:addinstance|Add a new URL resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The URL module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; URL&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frame height===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can specify the height of the top frame (containing the navigation) if you choose the  &amp;quot;in frame&amp;quot; display option.  Note:If your theme has a large header then the height should be increased to prevent horizontal and vertical scrollbars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can add a password that will connect your users to a secure site. [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=189842#p826416 See this forum post] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include role names in parameters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available display options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to add different ways the resource may be displayed on the course page. There are a number of defaults but you can add or change them here. Other display options are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In frame&#039;&#039; - show the Moodle heading and the file description, with the file displayed in a resizeable area below &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;New window&#039;&#039; - very much like &#039;in pop-up&#039;, but the new window is a full browser window, with menus and address bar, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Display.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values for activity settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the defaults for this resource. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See Also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/X32dao-UENQ The Moodle URL Resource] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Link/URL konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres de l&#039;URL]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del recurso URL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=URL_resource_settings&amp;diff=114293</id>
		<title>URL resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=URL_resource_settings&amp;diff=114293"/>
		<updated>2014-08-25T00:01:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{URL}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a URL resource to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu),choose URL. All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all/Collapse all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:urlgeneral25.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the URL so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your page here. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Either enter the URL in the external URL field or click the &amp;quot;Choose a link&amp;quot; button to open the file picker and choose a URL YouTube, Picasa etc (depending on which [[Repositories|repositories]] are enabled for the site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:urlappearance.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039; - Make the best guess at what should happen (probably what is wanted 99% of the time).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Embed&#039;&#039; - Show the Moodle page with heading, blocks and footer. Show the title/description of the item and display the file directly in the page as well&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039; - No Moodle heading, blocks, footer or description - just show the file in the web browser (e.g. shows image, PDF, flash animation, taking up the whole browser window)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In pop-up&#039;&#039; - Same as &#039;Open&#039;, but opens a new browser window to show this file (without the Moodle heading, blocks, etc) - this browser window also does not have all the menus and address bar in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above options are the default display options. Additional display options (see below) may be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; URL&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Pop-up width/height===&lt;br /&gt;
If your URL is to be displayed in a pop-up, specify the width and height here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display URL name/description===&lt;br /&gt;
To show the resource name and/or description when clicking to access the URL, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==URL variables==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:url.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to pass internal information as part of the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful if the URL is actually an interactive web page that takes parameters, and you want to pass something like the name of the current user, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drag and Drop a URL==&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, if an administrator has enabled the experimental feature drag and drop upload of text/links in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; [[Experimental settings]]&#039;&#039;, a link can be dragged into a section of the course and given a name, as shown in the images below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:dragURL.png|thumb|Adding a URL using drag and drop]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==URL module capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/url:view|View URL resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/url:addinstance|Add a new URL resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The URL module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; URL&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frame height===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can specify the height of the top frame (containing the navigation) if you choose the  &amp;quot;in frame&amp;quot; display option.  Note:If your theme has a large header then the height should be increased to prevent horizontal and vertical scrollbars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can add a password that will connect your users to a secure site. [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=189842#p826416 See this forum post] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include role names in parameters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available display options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to add different ways the resource may be displayed on the course page. There are a number of defaults but you can add or change them here. Other display options are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In frame&#039;&#039; - show the Moodle heading and the file description, with the file displayed in a resizeable area below &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;New window&#039;&#039; - very much like &#039;in pop-up&#039;, but the new window is a full browser window, with menus and address bar, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Display.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values for activity settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the defaults for this resource. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===See Also===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/X32dao-UENQ The Moodle URL Resource] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Link/URL konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres de l&#039;URL]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del recurso URL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Page&amp;diff=114291</id>
		<title>Using Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Page&amp;diff=114291"/>
		<updated>2014-08-25T00:00:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page}}==Why a page and not a file?==&lt;br /&gt;
#Opens seamlessly  - no clunky attempts to launch third party software (e.g. Microsoft Word) which some users may not be able to access.&lt;br /&gt;
#Can be accessed by mobile devices e.g. smartphones (again, not all smartphones can handle word-processed documents)&lt;br /&gt;
#Much easier for the Teacher to edit (i.e. saves time)&lt;br /&gt;
#Much more accessible, and readily configurable for reading (easier to resize text, change colours, etc, in the web browser)&lt;br /&gt;
#Can contain links - e.g. to files, to web pages, or to Glossary entries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===When to use a page rather than a file ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use a page if:&lt;br /&gt;
*The document doesn&#039;t need to be printed&lt;br /&gt;
*You need to update it fairly often&lt;br /&gt;
*You don&#039;t need to impose strict control over the way it looks (for accessibility reasons you should, if educationally appropriate, avoid taking control)&lt;br /&gt;
*Your students may need to refer to it (on their smartphone for example) frequently for reference e.g. timetable, schedule, tutorial groups, reading list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to create a page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Typing directly into the Editor===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Page module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Drag and drop text into a page===&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s possible to select text from a website or a word processed document and create a page by drag and drop. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: this does not work with IE, Safari 6 or below and is unreliable with Firefox&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop upload of text/links must be enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*Select the text you wish to use, for example in a Word document. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note: Pasting from MS Word is fraught with danger.&#039;&#039;&#039; See [[#Pasting from another document]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, drag the text over to the section you want it to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
*From the box that appears, choose &amp;quot;Create a new page resource&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
*Give it a name and then click &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pagedragdrop1.png|thumb|Select your text and drag into the course page]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pagedragdrop2.png|thumb|Give your page a name]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pagedragdrop3.png|thumb|The page is created]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pagedragdrop4.png|thumb|View of the page created from dragged and dropped text]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pasting from another document===&lt;br /&gt;
To safeguard against unpredictable, ugly, and inaccessible results, it&#039;s important to take some easy extra steps when pasting word processed and other text into web authoring software including Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the document containing the text you want to paste into your new Page, and copy that text ready to paste.&lt;br /&gt;
#Follow steps 1-6 for the section above on &#039;Typing directly into the editor&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you are ready to paste the content into Moodle, you have two choices:&lt;br /&gt;
#*If you want to keep the original formatting then click the Paste From Word icon; a pane loads containing an empty text field and you can press your keyboard&#039;s Control and V keys to paste what you copied into the text field; then click the Insert button; your text appears and can be edited within learn.gold. N.b. if the original formatting does not conform to Web accessibility requirements, it won&#039;t be transferred.&lt;br /&gt;
#*Alternatively, if you want to strip away all formatting, rather than the Paste From Word icon you instead click the Paste As Plain Text icon and proceed to paste directly.&lt;br /&gt;
#Follow steps 8-9 for the section above on &#039;Typing directly into the editor&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/j1uHPVFJFdM The Moodle Page Resource] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Textseiten nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Page_resource_settings&amp;diff=114289</id>
		<title>Page resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Page_resource_settings&amp;diff=114289"/>
		<updated>2014-08-24T23:59:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Updating MoodleBites video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a new page to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From the the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu),choose [[Page]] All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &amp;quot;Adding a new page&amp;quot; screen that follows, give your page a name and a description (which may or may not be required according to admin settings)&lt;br /&gt;
*Add your content to the Page content section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pagegeneral26.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the page so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your page here. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pagecontent26.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add your page content here. You can use the features of the [[Text editor|Text editor]] to add media, images, links and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pageappearance26.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here whether or not to display the page description along with the page content when a user clicks on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has allowed both &#039;open&#039; and &#039;pop-up&#039; as display options (&#039;&#039;from Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Page&#039;&#039;), you will have additional display settings here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Page module capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/page:view|View page content]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/page:addinstance|Add a new page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Page&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available display options===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to add different ways the resource may be displayed on the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values for activity settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the defaults for this resource. You can also choose which setting(s) to class as &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;. These settings will only then appear if the user clicks &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot; in the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/j1uHPVFJFdM The Moodle Page Resource] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Textseite konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del módulo página]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File_resource_settings&amp;diff=114288</id>
		<title>File resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File_resource_settings&amp;diff=114288"/>
		<updated>2014-08-24T23:58:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Updating MoodleBites video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{File}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a file to your course&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragandrop.png|thumb|Quick method of adding a file]]&lt;br /&gt;
Quick method: (&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039; - &#039;&#039;does not work with Internet Explorer 9 or lower&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and drop the file onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear&lt;br /&gt;
# If necessary, edit the title of the file by clicking the pencil icon, or edit other options (see below) by clicking the editing icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longer method:&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link, then in the activity chooser, select file then click the Add button (or select file from the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; dropdown menu) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select your options as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:filegeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the file so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your file here if desired (or required.) Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:filecontent25.png|thumb|Content settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Either drag and drop your file onto the arrow if you are using an appropriate browser, or click on &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; and use the [[File picker]] to upload your file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Note that if legacy files were used there will be a setting &amp;quot;Migration of old course file&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fileappearance25.png|thumb|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display===&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039; - Make the best guess at what should happen (probably what is wanted 99% of the time).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Embed&#039;&#039; - Show the Moodle page with heading, blocks and footer. Show the title/description of the item and display the file directly in the page as well (good for images, flash animations, videos?, PDFs).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Force download&#039;&#039; - user clicks on the file, then the web browser pops up with the &#039;where do you want to save this file&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039; - No Moodle heading, blocks, footer or description - just show the file in the web browser (e.g. shows image, PDF, flash animation, taking up the whole browser window)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In pop-up&#039;&#039; - Same as &#039;Open&#039;, but opens a new browser window to show this file (without the Moodle heading, blocks, etc) - this browser window also does not have all the menus and address bar in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The following additional options are only there if you enable them via &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; File&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In frame&#039;&#039; - show the Moodle heading and the file description, with the file displayed in a resizable area below (images, PDF, flash, etc. supported).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;New window&#039;&#039; - very much like &#039;in pop-up&#039;, but the new window is a full browser window, with menus and address bar, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of the above is true of items that can be displayed inside the browser directly (e.g. images, text files, PDFs (with plugin)). If the file cannot be displayed within the browser (e.g. word documents, without a suitable plugin, or other files that need to be loaded by an external program), then the pop-ups or frames, etc. will be created, but then the browser will take over and ask if you want to save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To summarise:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want Moodle to sort it all out for you? - Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to force the user to save the file (or open it in a program on their desktop)? - Force download&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to show the file as part of the Moodle page (images, PDFs, videos)? - Embed&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to show the file in the browser, but without the Moodle page decorations (images, PDFs, videos)? - Open&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want that, but in a new window? - In Pop-up (or possibly &#039;New window&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to use a horrible bit of non-strict HTML that should never be allowed in polite company? - In frame&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show size.type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show the file size and/or type on the course page and also on the resource page, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
====Display resource name/description====&lt;br /&gt;
To show the resource name and/or description when clicking to access the file, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pop-up width/height===&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is visible when &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot; is clicked.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your file is to be displayed in a pop-up, specify the width and height here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use filters on file content===&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is visible when &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot; is clicked.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish  included media such as images and mp3 to appear embedded in the files then select &amp;quot;all files&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;HTML files only&amp;quot;, according to your file types. (Note that this  setting may cause problems for some Flash and Java applets.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying a website index page==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Setmainfile.png|thumb|Setting the main file]]&lt;br /&gt;
The file module may be used if you have a folder with linked files such as a website with an index.html file or a flash activity with xml/swf and index file.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:file resource.png|thumb|Website index page set as main file]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and drop the zipped folder onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear, answer &#039;Create file resource&#039; to the popup dialogue, then click the upload button &lt;br /&gt;
# Clicking the editing icon (hand with a pen) then click on the zip file and unzip it&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the index.html file or the file you want to start displaying your linked files from then in the popup dialogue click the button &#039;Set main file&#039;. This ensures this file is the one that appears on the course page for students to click on. The main file is then indicated with a title in bold.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Save and display&#039; at the bottom of the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==File module capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/resource:view|View file resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/resource:addinstance|Add a new file resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; File&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frame height===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can specify the height of the top frame (containing the navigation) if you choose the  &amp;quot;in frame&amp;quot; display option.  Note: If your theme has a large header then the &#039;&#039;resource_framesize&#039;&#039; variable should be increased to prevent horizontal and vertical scrollbars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available display options===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FileOptions.jpg|thumb|Setting the Admin File Display Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to add different ways the resource may be displayed on the course page.  By default Moodle doesn&#039;t enable &amp;quot;New window&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;In frame&amp;quot;, so you need to set them available here if required, and you can also disable other options if not applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values for activity settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the defaults for this resource. You can also choose which setting(s) to class as &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;. These settings will only then appear if the user clicks &amp;quot;Show More&amp;quot; in the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*HQ Youtube video tutorial: [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vr41LtX8Mlc&amp;amp;index=21&amp;amp;list=PLxcO_MFWQBDdQjcGsbROYKwEIM-IlXmpR Dragging and dropping files into Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
*HQ Youtube video tutorial: [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=07MpjfRIpXY&amp;amp;list=PLxcO_MFWQBDdQjcGsbROYKwEIM-IlXmpR&amp;amp;index=21 Uploading files to Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/Rg2Xwe4HOFQ The Moodle File Resource] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/ZPaVskLCRb4 Moodle 2 file management]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datei konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del recurso archivo]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Label&amp;diff=114287</id>
		<title>Using Label</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Label&amp;diff=114287"/>
		<updated>2014-08-24T23:56:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MBites video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Label}}&lt;br /&gt;
A label is a versatile module that can serve a spacer between resources on a course page. It can provide a space for embedding banners, sound or video files or displaying code from Web 2.0 widgets.&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding images to a label==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Drag and drop images===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: this does not work with IE 9, Safari 6 or below or earlier versions of Firefox)&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*Media drag and  drop must be enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Label&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, drag your image into the section you want it to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the box that follows, choose &amp;quot;add image&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*It will appear embedded in a label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:dragdrop1.png|thumb|Drag an image onto your course page]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:dragdrop2.png|thumb|Choose &amp;quot;add image..&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:dragdrop3.png|thumb|And here it is!]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Conventional method===&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the instructions for [[Label_module_settings| adding a label]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the image icon in the [[HTML_editor|text editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imageicon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Browse repositories&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose and upload your image using the filepicker.(Details on how to do this[[File_picker| here]])&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labelbanner2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding text to a label==&lt;br /&gt;
===Conventional  method===&lt;br /&gt;
As the label uses the [[Text editor]] it is straightforward to enter text and other required symbols and equations. It is however possible also to drag and drop text directly into a label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Drag and drop text===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: this does not work with IE, Safari 6 or below and is unreliable with Firefox&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop upload of text/links must be enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*Select the text you wish to use, for example in a Word document.&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, drag the text over to the section you want it to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
*From the box that appears, choose &amp;quot;add a label&amp;quot; and then &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:textdragdrop1.png|thumb|Text selected from a Word document is dragged over]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:textdragdrop2.png|thumb|Choose &amp;quot;add a label&amp;quot; (or page if you prefer)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:textdragdrop3.png|thumb|And here it is!]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a link to a label==&lt;br /&gt;
===Conventional  method===&lt;br /&gt;
As the label uses the [[Text editor]] it is straightforward to click the &amp;quot;link&amp;quot; icon and enter your linked URL. It is however possible also to drag and drop links directly into a label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Drag and drop links===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: this does not work with IE, Safari 6 or below and is unreliable with Firefox&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop upload of text/links must be enabled in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*Open up a new window with the URL you wish to link to. Select the link in the browser bar.&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, drag the URL over to the section you want it to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
*From the box that appears, name the link  and then click &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:linkdragdrop1.png|thumb|Select your URL]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:linkdragdrop2.png|thumb|Name the link]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:linkdragdrop3.png|thumb|Here it is!]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding sound or video to a label==&lt;br /&gt;
If multimedia filters are enabled, a label is a neat way of displaying sound or video in an inline player on the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the instructions for [[Label_module_settings| adding a label]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the media icon in the [[HTML_editor|text editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Addmedia.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Find or upload an sound,video or applet&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose and upload your sound or video file using the filepicker.(Details on how to do this[[File_picker| here]])&lt;br /&gt;
*Note: You can search youtube for a video to embed if your admin has enabled the youtube repository.&lt;br /&gt;
*Leave Common module settings at &amp;quot;show&amp;quot; if you wish the label to be visible.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Videoinlabel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding code to a label==&lt;br /&gt;
An example of this is the ability to embed a Google map into a label.&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the instructions for [[Label_module_settings| adding a label]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Expand the toolbar and click the HTML icon in the [[HTML_editor|text editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Codelabel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*This brings up the screen in code (HTML) view.&lt;br /&gt;
*Paste the code you grabbed from Google maps into this screen&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Addcode.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Leave Common module settings at &amp;quot;show&amp;quot; if you wish the label to be visible.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlemaplabel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The success in adding code to a label depends both on the type of code and the permissions of the user. (Details to follow)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/C6wZaC5gOHk The Moodle Label Resource] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=165626 Right align not behaving as desired]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Textfelder nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Label_module_settings&amp;diff=114286</id>
		<title>Label module settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Label_module_settings&amp;diff=114286"/>
		<updated>2014-08-24T23:56:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ updating MBites video&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Label}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a label==&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on to a course by choosing Label from the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu) in the section where you want to add your menu. Click &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; top right to see all the settings expanded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Atto1row.png|thumb|Editor with single toolbar]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Atto2rows.png|thumb|Editor expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Type your chosen words or add your resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Note: Because the label has the [[HTML_editor| text editor]], it is possible not just to type words but also to add images, links, media or code from within the labels&#039; editor. See [[Using_Label| here]] for suggestions about using labels in your course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Leave Common Module settings as &amp;quot;show&amp;quot; for the label to be visible.&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can now use the move icon (crosshair or up/down arrow) to move your label to where you wish it to display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:newlabel25.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Label capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/label:addinstance|Add a new label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/C6wZaC5gOHk The Moodle Label Resource] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Textfeld konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de módulo etiqueta]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Course_formats&amp;diff=114159</id>
		<title>Course formats</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Course_formats&amp;diff=114159"/>
		<updated>2014-08-14T09:33:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
A course format refers to the layout of a course.  The course format can be selected in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can enable, disable or delete course formats for courses in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Course formats &amp;gt; Manage course formats.&#039;&#039; They can also change the order in which available course formats are displayed to teachers in the course settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:managecourseformats.png|thumb|Manage course formats screen for admins]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Standard course formats==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Weekly format===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Weeklyoutline.png|thumb|Weekly format example]] The course is organized week by week, with a clear start date and a finish date.  Moodle will create a section for each week of your course.  You can add content, forums, quizzes, and so on in the section for each week.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If you want all your students to work on the same materials at the same time, this would be a good format to choose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039; Make sure your course start date is correct. If it is not your weeks will have the wrong date on it. This is especially important if you are restoring a course to use with a new section of students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Topics format===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Topicoutline.png|thumb|Topic format example]]The course is organised into topic sections that a teacher can give titles to. Each topic section consists of activities, resources and labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TIP: This is great to use if your course is objective based and each objective may take different amounts of time to complete. An example of this would be scaffolding where the students are building upon the knowledge from earlier topics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;quot;Show only one section&amp;quot;====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Weekly, Topics and any contributed format that implements the functionalty, it is possible via &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039; to &amp;quot;show one section per page&amp;quot;. Here is a course with eight topics, with the third one currently shown. The links left and right lead to topics two and four:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Single_section_page.png|frame|center|Single section page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Notes:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*The course home page shows just the section names and any text in the section description along with activity and resource numbers, with the names being click-able.  &lt;br /&gt;
*If editing is ON, then the Main course page will display all the content in all the sections.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is a &#039;Jump to...&#039; menu at the bottom of each single section page (new in 2.5 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Social format===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Socialformat.png|thumb|Social format example]] This format is oriented around one main [[Forum module|forum]], the social forum, which appears listed on the main page.  It is useful for situations that are more free form.  They may not even be courses. The [http://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=55 Moodle Lounge] is an example of a social format course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The social forum can be edited by clicking the &#039;Update this forum&#039; button on the social forum page. The forum introduction is displayed at the top of the course page. Activities and resources can be added on side utilising the [[Social activities block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Single activity  format===&lt;br /&gt;
The single activity format only has 1 section, and allows the teacher to add one activity only to the course.  When the single activity format is selected, a drop down menu appears for the teacher to choose the activity they wish to use. See the &amp;quot;See also&amp;quot; section below for a screencast and working example of the single activity course format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26singleactivity.png|200px|thumb|Selecting the Single activity format]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: This course format replaces the SCORM format in earlier versions of Moodle, as it is possible here to select a SCORM package as the single activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Single activity format with a forum as the activity and social format are very similar. The only difference is when the course contains other activities. The single activity format displays them as &amp;quot;orphaned&amp;quot; and for teachers only; the social format displays them in an activities block and available for students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contributed Course Formats==&lt;br /&gt;
The Moodle community has developed a number of course formats, available in the [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=19 plugins directory]. If you plan to create a new one, see [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Course_formats Developers documentation].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See MDL-27646 and MDL-28555 and maybe the discussion http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=175758#p770737&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Collapsed Topics===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a format that is essentially the same as the standard Topic and Weekly formats but with a &#039;toggle&#039; for each section except &#039;0&#039;.  The toggles&#039; purpose is to reduce the amount of initial information presented to the user thus reducing the &#039;scroll of death&#039; that can plague courses with a lot of content.  The &#039;state&#039; of the toggles is remembered on a per course per user basis.  For more information, please visit [[Collapsed_Topics_course_format]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Overview ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For an overview of &#039;Collapsed Topics&#039; please see this video:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=c9NaEAPPC5E&amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Daily format===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=format_days daily format] is a modification of the weekly format that shows sections by day rather than by week.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grid format===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=format_grid grid format] is a modular and visual course format. Hides all topics and creates a grid of icons (one for each topic) with short titles. Clicking on an icon brings up the content from the corresponding topic in a &amp;quot;lightbox&amp;quot; style display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Menutopic format===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=format_menutopic menutopic format] allows you to display the topics/sections in a menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Noticeboard format===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=format_noticebd Noticeboard format] presents the latest post in the news forum at the top of the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Onetopic format===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=format_onetopic onetopic format] shows each topic in a tab, keeping the current tab between calls to resources, in such a way that when it returns from a module as the blog or the glossary it returns to tab from where you started. This format is based on the Moodle standard format: “Topics”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Topic format (colors)===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=format_colours colored topic format] is based on the &#039;Topics&#039; standard format and allows a teacher to specify the foreground and background colours for each course section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Flexible sections format===&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=format_flexsections flexible sections format] for Moodle 2.4+ allows to have nested sections and each section may be displayed expanded (with all content on the parent section page) or collapsed (as a link to a separate page)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other contributed course formats are available from the [http://moodle.org/plugins modules and plugins database].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/19ke-cvhnug Moodle Course Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
*Screencast: [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bkdgPGHJi3Q&amp;amp;feature=share&amp;amp;list=SPxcO_MFWQBDe8RRnGjoUDqbcm9PSlIoWn&amp;amp;index=2 Single Activity course format]&lt;br /&gt;
*Example of a single activity course format on school.demo.moodle.net:  [http://school.demo.moodle.net/mod/quiz/view.php?id=1511 Moodle History Quiz] (Log in with username: &#039;&#039;parent&#039;&#039; and password: &#039;&#039;moodle&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=47 Course formats forum]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moodleman.net/archives/47 Getting the most out of course design] blog post describing various contributed course formats&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=116428 Social format: where to put an introduction]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=136453 RSS Feed for forum in a Social Format course]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kursformate]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Formatos de curso]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Formats de cours]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Course_settings&amp;diff=114158</id>
		<title>Course settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Course_settings&amp;diff=114158"/>
		<updated>2014-08-14T09:30:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher, or other user with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:update|update course settings capability]], can change course settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:generalcourse25.png|thumb|500px|General settings,expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course full name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the name of the course.  It is displayed as a link on course lists on the [[Front page]] and on [[My home]] and in reports.  It is also used in the browser title bar when the course is viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changefullname|moodle/course:changefullname]] controls whether a user can edit the course full name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many institutions have a shorthand way of referring to a course, such as BP102 or COMMS.  Even if you do not already have such a name for your course, make one up here.  It will be used in several places where the long name is not appropriate, such as the Navigation block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeshortname|moodle/course:changeshortname]] controls whether a user can edit the short name field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only course full names are displayed in the list of courses. However an administrator can enable short names to be displayed too if required by ticking the checkbox in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Courses&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course category===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site administrator may have created course categories to help teachers and students find their courses easily.  Course categories may be reflected in the [[Navigation block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changecategory|moodle/course:changecategory]] controls whether a user can edit the course category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course start date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting affects the display of logs and the weekly format topic dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use the &amp;quot;Weekly&amp;quot; course format, the start date will appear in the first section of the course. For example selecting 27 July, will display &amp;quot;27 July - 2 August&amp;quot; in the first section (when default display is selected for that section).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will have an effect on the display of logs. This will be the earliest possible date the log activity will display. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; affect courses using the &#039;social&#039; or &#039;topics&#039; formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If your institution runs on a weekly schedule, you may want to consider setting the start date for courses on the first day of the week, like a Monday. Please note that the &#039;first day of the week&#039; is set by the [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig langconfig file] of your [[Language]], and might be different from the default Monday of the English language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; In general, if your course does not have a real starting date then set the date to yesterday and use the availability setting to reveal the course to students.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; See self enrolment course settings to prevent students from entering the course before a certain date/time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Visible===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can &amp;quot;hide&amp;quot; your course completely. It will not appear on any course listings, except for managers, course creators, teachers and any other users with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:viewhiddencourses|view hidden courses capability]]. Even if students try to access the course URL directly, they will not be allowed to enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Capabilities/moodle/course:visibility|hide/show courses capability]] controls whether a user can hide a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In earlier versions of Moodle, this setting was named &#039;Course availability&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course ID number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ID number is an alphanumeric field.  It has several potential uses.  Generally, it is not displayed to students.  However, it can be used to match this course against an external system&#039;s ID, as your course catalogue ID or can be used in the certificate module as a printed field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeidnumber|moodle/course:changeidnumber]] controls whether a user can edit the ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursesummary.png|thumb|500px|Description settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course summary===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The summary appears on the course listings page.  This field is searched when searching for a course and also appears in the Course/Site description block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary|moodle/course:changesummary]] controls whether a user can edit the course summary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course summary files===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An image (and if allowed by the administrator, other file types) may be attached to the course summary. They will be accessible by anyone from outside of the course just like  the course name and/or summary. Only users with [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary| moodle/course:changesummary capability]] are able to upload/change course summary files.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that if this is not allowed by the administrator, then no box will appear to upload course summary files&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only jpg, gif and png file types are allowed as course summary files. An administrator can change the allowed file types in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Courses&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course format==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursefomat25.png|thumb|500px|Course format settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Course formats]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of sections===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is only used by the &#039;weekly&#039; and &#039;topics&#039; course formats.  In the &#039;weekly&#039; format, it specifies the number of weeks that the course will run for, starting from the course starting date.  In the &#039;topics&#039; format, it specifies the number of topics in the course.  Both of these translate to the number of &amp;quot;boxes&amp;quot; down the middle of the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the number of weeks/topics is changed for an existing course so that the number is less than the number of course sections containing activities (for example the course contains activities in 3 sections and the number or weeks/topics is set to 2) then when editing is turned on section(s) at the bottom of the course page will be shown with the title &#039;Orphaned activities&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of weeks/topics may be set to 0, so that only the top general section is displayed on the course page and there are no numbered sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the maximum number of weeks/topics is 52, but an administrator can set a different maximum number which will apply to all courses on the site (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hidden sections===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to decide how the hidden sections in your course are displayed to students.  By default, a small area is shown (in collapsed form, usually grey) to indicate where the hidden section is, though they still cannot actually see the hidden activities and texts.  This is particularly useful in the Weekly format, so that non-class weeks are clear, or if you have quizzes you don&#039;t want your students to see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If you choose, these non-available items can be completely hidden, so that students do not even know  that sections or an activity in the course are hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course layout===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Course layout setting determines whether the whole course is displayed on one page or split over several pages. The setting currently applies to the topics and weekly core course formats and contributed collapsed topics course format only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers choose from the dropdown whether they wish to &amp;quot;show all sections on one page&amp;quot; in the familiar scrolling format, or &amp;quot;show one section per page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If one section per page is selected, the course page is abbreviated to a list of links to individual sections. If an individual section is shown, next and previous sections may be accessed via links above and below the section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:one section per page course format.png|thumb|Course page for course using one section per page course layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Single_section_page.png|thumb|Individual section of a course using one section per page course layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Visit the School demo site course [http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=37 The Types of Sport] to see the &amp;quot;Show one section per page&amp;quot; course layout in action!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further details plus screenshots, see blog post [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2012/05/08/moodle-2-3-section-per-page/ Moodle 2.3 – Section per page] by Gavin Henrick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:appearancecourse252.png|thumb|500px|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force theme===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the site administrator has allowed the teacher to set a course [[Themes|theme]], this pull down menu will appear with a list of themes on the site.  Teachers can use this to choose a different look for the course from the rest of the Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Force language===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you force a language in a course, the interface of Moodle in this course will be in this particular language, even if a student has selected a different preferred language in his/her personal profile.&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:forcelanguage|moodle/site:forcelanguage]] may be allowed by the admin for users who need to override this language (for example, when testing problems in a course in a language they do not know.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===News items to show===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many news items should show the [[Latest news block]].   Set it to 0 and Latest news block will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Latest News block relies on the use of the associated News Forum. News posted in other forums do not display in the latest News block&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show gradebook to students===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to allow students to see the link to [[Grades|grades]] in the Administration block. If your course doesn&#039;t use graded activities, it makes sense to disable this. If grades are used and this link is disabled, students can still see their grade from the actual activity itself, such as an [[Assignment|assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show activity reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to show students their [[Activity_report#Individual_Activity_Report|activity reports]]. Doing so places a load on the server however, which is why the setting is disabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Files and uploads==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum upload size===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide the largest size of file that students can upload to a course.  The site administrator can determine [[Site_policies#Maximum_uploaded_file_sizefile |sizes available]] for the teacher to select. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Editing teachers or other users may be allowed to upload files larger than the maximum size by giving them the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:ignorefilesizelimits|moodle/course:ignorefilesizelimits]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Completion tracking==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Completion  tracking must be enabled for [[Activity completion]]. [[Course completion]] criteria may also be based upon Activity completion values found in the activity&#039;s settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Guest access==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:guestaccess25.png|thumb|500px|Guest access settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to allow logged in users to access the course as a guest, and whether or not they need to enter a password. See [[Guest role|Guest role]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursegroups25.png|thumb|500px|Groups settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group mode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can define the [[Groups|group mode]] at the course level by a pull down menu. &amp;quot;[[Groups#No_groups|No groups]]&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;[[Groups#Separate_groups|Separate groups]]&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;[[Groups#Visible_groups|Visible groups]]&amp;quot; are the choices. The selected setting will be the default group mode for all activities defined within that course.  The group setting can affect what users see in the [[Participants]] list and who they can interact with in activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the group mode is &amp;quot;forced&amp;quot; at a course-level, then this particular group mode will be applied to every activity in that course. This will override any activities that may have a special group setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default grouping===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If [[Groupings|groupings]] are enabled, a default grouping for course activities and resources may be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Role renaming==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:rolerenaming.png|thumb|500px|Role renaming settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
You can rename the [[Roles|roles]] used in your course. For example, you may wish to rename the [[Teacher role]] as &amp;quot;Facilitator&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Tutor&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Guide&amp;quot;. These new role names will appear within the course. For example on the [[Participants|participants]] and the override permissions pages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the site administrator or a [[Manager |course manager]] may have changed the names or added new roles.  These names will appear and the teacher may rename them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can set course default settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course default settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of weeks/topics may be set for all courses on the site. The default value is 52.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing teachers from editing course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any/all of the following fields - course full name, short name, ID number and category, summary - may be locked to prevent teachers from editing them. To do so:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Access &#039;&#039;Site Administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the edit icon opposite the teacher role.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any/all of the capabilities [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changefullname|moodle/course:changefullname]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeshortname|moodle/course:changeshortname]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeidnumber|moodle/course:changeidnumber]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changecategory|moodle/course:changecategory]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary|moodle/course:changesummary]] from allow to not set.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button at the bottom of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/19ke-cvhnug Moodle Course Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/rg6rUuBwITo Moodle 2 Administration Courses] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurseinstellungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del curso]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroaren_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres du cours]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:コース設定]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Adding_a_new_course&amp;diff=114157</id>
		<title>Adding a new course</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Adding_a_new_course&amp;diff=114157"/>
		<updated>2014-08-14T09:29:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* Screencasts */ Updating MoodleBites video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default a regular teacher can&#039;t add a new course. To add a new course to Moodle, you need to have either [[Administrator|Administrator]], [[Course creator|Course Creator]] or [[Manager|Manager]] rights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a course==&lt;br /&gt;
To add a course:&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site Administration&amp;gt;Courses&amp;gt;Manage courses and categories&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26addcourse.png|200px|thumb|Link to add a new course]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26addcourse1.png|200px|thumb|Click New course in the category page on the right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the category where you want your course to be. For more information see [[Course categories|Course categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;New course&amp;quot; link&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter the [[Course settings|course settings]], then click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*On the next screen, choose your students/teachers to assign to the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Deleting a course(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A regular teacher can&#039;t delete a course. Administrators and managers (i.e. users with a role for which the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:delete|moodle/course:delete]] is allowed) can delete courses. A [[Course creator|Course creator]] can delete courses they have created themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a course (as an administrator or manager):&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site Administration&amp;gt;Courses&amp;gt;Manage courses and categories&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the course&#039;s category and click the course in the screen on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Delete link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26coursedelete.png|200px|thumb|Deleting a course]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete multiple courses by: &lt;br /&gt;
*Creating a new (temporary) category. You can name it &amp;quot;To be deleted&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select and &#039;&#039;&#039;move&#039;&#039;&#039; the &amp;quot;About to be deleted&amp;quot; courses to that category (&amp;quot;To be deleted&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
*Delete the category (&amp;quot;To be deleted&amp;quot;) and choose &amp;quot;Delete ALL - cannot be undone&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no user interface for course creators to delete courses they have created; however they can do so by editing the URL of the course from &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.net/course/view.php?id=N&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.net/course/delete.php?id=N&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (replacing &#039;view&#039; with &#039;delete&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course requests==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Courserequest.png|thumb|Course request screen]]The course request feature can be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course request&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An admin can set the default category for course requests, whether users can select a category when requesting a course, and who can receive notification of course requests (from a list of users with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:approvecourse|moodle/site:approvecourse]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A  &#039;Request a new course&#039; button will then appear on the &#039;All courses&#039; page. The All courses page can be accessed via a link in the [[Courses block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If course requests are enabled, by default all authenticated users can make course requests. See [[Course requester role]] for details of how to restrict users who can make course requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bulk course creation==&lt;br /&gt;
For full details on how to bulk create courses and use course templates, see [[Upload courses]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Upload courses&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload a CSV file either by dragging and dropping or using the button to select from the File picker.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your import options and click Preview. If the settings are acceptable, click Upload.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course templates==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible, from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site Administration&amp;gt;Courses&amp;gt;Upload courses&#039;&#039; to specify a course and settings to use as  template for future courses:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using an existing course as a template===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, create or locate on your Moodle the course you wish to use as a template and make a note of its shortname. A template course might for example have common headings or section summaries or policy agreements used throughout the site for consistency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that only the content of the course will be restored; not its settings. Settings are added separately.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 1====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create your csv file. See [[Upload courses]] for accepted fields.&lt;br /&gt;
*From &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Administration&amp;gt;Courses&amp;gt;Upload courses&#039;&#039;, add your file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Preview it and scroll down to &#039;Course process&#039;. In the box &#039;Restore from this course after upload&#039;, add the shortname of your template course.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are creating several courses using the same template and you wish them all to have the same settings, you can specify these in the Default course values.&lt;br /&gt;
*Upload your csv file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:template1.png|thumb|400px|Adding shortname of template course]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26defaultcoursevalues.png|thumb|400|Default course values]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Method 2====&lt;br /&gt;
*All the settings and the chosen template course can be specified in the csv file you create. Use &#039;&#039;templatecourse&#039;&#039; as the field for your chosen template course, and use the course shortname. See [[Upload courses]] for full list of fields you can include.&lt;br /&gt;
*Here is an example of a csv file for restoring a course to be used as a template. It specifies for example the theme, language, enrolment method and alternative names for student and teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code bash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
shortname,fullname,category,newsitems,theme,lang,format,enrolment_1,enrolment_1_role,role_student,role_teacher,templatecourse&lt;br /&gt;
Knit,Knitting,2,0,afterburner,fr,topics,manual,student,NewKnitter,MasterKnitter,OMT&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Courses&amp;gt;Upload courses and add your csv file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using a backup course as a template===&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible during the process of creating courses with a csv file in &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Administration&amp;gt;Courses&amp;gt;Upload courses&#039;&#039; to specify and upload a backup file to be used as a template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Create your csv file. See [[Upload courses]] for accepted fields.&lt;br /&gt;
*From &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Administration&amp;gt;Courses&amp;gt;Upload courses&#039;&#039;, add your file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Preview it and scroll down to &#039;Course process&#039;. In the box &#039;Restore from this file after upload&#039;, add the backup file you wish to use as the template.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are creating several courses using the same template and you wish them all to have the same settings, you can specify these in the &#039;Default course values&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, you can specify the course settings (such as format, enrolment methods, language) in the csv file. This method is useful if you wish different courses using the same template to have different settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*Upload your csv file.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:template2.png|thumb|400px|Uploading a template course]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Screencasts===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/MzK2jb-9SwE Bulk course creation]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/19ke-cvhnug Moodle Course Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/rg6rUuBwITo Moodle 2 Administration Courses] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Forum discussions===&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=83830 Hide Courses from some users or students] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurs anlegen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Añadiendo un nuevo curso]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroak_%28Kudeatzaileak%29]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Course_settings&amp;diff=114156</id>
		<title>Course settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Course_settings&amp;diff=114156"/>
		<updated>2014-08-14T09:28:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Updating MoodleBites video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher, or other user with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:update|update course settings capability]], can change course settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:generalcourse25.png|thumb|500px|General settings,expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course full name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the name of the course.  It is displayed as a link on course lists on the [[Front page]] and on [[My home]] and in reports.  It is also used in the browser title bar when the course is viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changefullname|moodle/course:changefullname]] controls whether a user can edit the course full name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many institutions have a shorthand way of referring to a course, such as BP102 or COMMS.  Even if you do not already have such a name for your course, make one up here.  It will be used in several places where the long name is not appropriate, such as the Navigation block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeshortname|moodle/course:changeshortname]] controls whether a user can edit the short name field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only course full names are displayed in the list of courses. However an administrator can enable short names to be displayed too if required by ticking the checkbox in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Courses&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course category===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site administrator may have created course categories to help teachers and students find their courses easily.  Course categories may be reflected in the [[Navigation block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changecategory|moodle/course:changecategory]] controls whether a user can edit the course category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course start date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting affects the display of logs and the weekly format topic dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use the &amp;quot;Weekly&amp;quot; course format, the start date will appear in the first section of the course. For example selecting 27 July, will display &amp;quot;27 July - 2 August&amp;quot; in the first section (when default display is selected for that section).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will have an effect on the display of logs. This will be the earliest possible date the log activity will display. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; affect courses using the &#039;social&#039; or &#039;topics&#039; formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If your institution runs on a weekly schedule, you may want to consider setting the start date for courses on the first day of the week, like a Monday. Please note that the &#039;first day of the week&#039; is set by the [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig langconfig file] of your [[Language]], and might be different from the default Monday of the English language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; In general, if your course does not have a real starting date then set the date to yesterday and use the availability setting to reveal the course to students.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; See self enrolment course settings to prevent students from entering the course before a certain date/time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Visible===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can &amp;quot;hide&amp;quot; your course completely. It will not appear on any course listings, except for managers, course creators, teachers and any other users with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:viewhiddencourses|view hidden courses capability]]. Even if students try to access the course URL directly, they will not be allowed to enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Capabilities/moodle/course:visibility|hide/show courses capability]] controls whether a user can hide a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In earlier versions of Moodle, this setting was named &#039;Course availability&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course ID number===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ID number is an alphanumeric field.  It has several potential uses.  Generally, it is not displayed to students.  However, it can be used to match this course against an external system&#039;s ID, as your course catalogue ID or can be used in the certificate module as a printed field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeidnumber|moodle/course:changeidnumber]] controls whether a user can edit the ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursesummary.png|thumb|500px|Description settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course summary===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The summary appears on the course listings page.  This field is searched when searching for a course and also appears in the Course/Site description block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary|moodle/course:changesummary]] controls whether a user can edit the course summary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course summary files===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An image (and if allowed by the administrator, other file types) may be attached to the course summary. They will be accessible by anyone from outside of the course just like  the course name and/or summary. Only users with [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary| moodle/course:changesummary capability]] are able to upload/change course summary files.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that if this is not allowed by the administrator, then no box will appear to upload course summary files&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only jpg, gif and png file types are allowed as course summary files. An administrator can change the allowed file types in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Courses&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course format==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursefomat25.png|thumb|500px|Course format settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Course formats]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of sections===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is only used by the &#039;weekly&#039; and &#039;topics&#039; course formats.  In the &#039;weekly&#039; format, it specifies the number of weeks that the course will run for, starting from the course starting date.  In the &#039;topics&#039; format, it specifies the number of topics in the course.  Both of these translate to the number of &amp;quot;boxes&amp;quot; down the middle of the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the number of weeks/topics is changed for an existing course so that the number is less than the number of course sections containing activities (for example the course contains activities in 3 sections and the number or weeks/topics is set to 2) then when editing is turned on section(s) at the bottom of the course page will be shown with the title &#039;Orphaned activities&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of weeks/topics may be set to 0, so that only the top general section is displayed on the course page and there are no numbered sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the maximum number of weeks/topics is 52, but an administrator can set a different maximum number which will apply to all courses on the site (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hidden sections===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to decide how the hidden sections in your course are displayed to students.  By default, a small area is shown (in collapsed form, usually grey) to indicate where the hidden section is, though they still cannot actually see the hidden activities and texts.  This is particularly useful in the Weekly format, so that non-class weeks are clear, or if you have quizzes you don&#039;t want your students to see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If you choose, these non-available items can be completely hidden, so that students do not even know  that sections or an activity in the course are hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course layout===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Course layout setting determines whether the whole course is displayed on one page or split over several pages. The setting currently applies to the topics and weekly core course formats and contributed collapsed topics course format only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers choose from the dropdown whether they wish to &amp;quot;show all sections on one page&amp;quot; in the familiar scrolling format, or &amp;quot;show one section per page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If one section per page is selected, the course page is abbreviated to a list of links to individual sections. If an individual section is shown, next and previous sections may be accessed via links above and below the section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:one section per page course format.png|thumb|Course page for course using one section per page course layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Single_section_page.png|thumb|Individual section of a course using one section per page course layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Visit the School demo site course [http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=37 The Types of Sport] to see the &amp;quot;Show one section per page&amp;quot; course layout in action!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further details plus screenshots, see blog post [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2012/05/08/moodle-2-3-section-per-page/ Moodle 2.3 – Section per page] by Gavin Henrick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:appearancecourse252.png|thumb|500px|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force theme===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the site administrator has allowed the teacher to set a course [[Themes|theme]], this pull down menu will appear with a list of themes on the site.  Teachers can use this to choose a different look for the course from the rest of the Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Force language===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you force a language in a course, the interface of Moodle in this course will be in this particular language, even if a student has selected a different preferred language in his/her personal profile.&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:forcelanguage|moodle/site:forcelanguage]] may be allowed by the admin for users who need to override this language (for example, when testing problems in a course in a language they do not know.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===News items to show===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many news items should show the [[Latest news block]].   Set it to 0 and Latest news block will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Latest News block relies on the use of the associated News Forum. News posted in other forums do not display in the latest News block&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show gradebook to students===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to allow students to see the link to [[Grades|grades]] in the Administration block. If your course doesn&#039;t use graded activities, it makes sense to disable this. If grades are used and this link is disabled, students can still see their grade from the actual activity itself, such as an [[Assignment|assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show activity reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to show students their [[Activity_report#Individual_Activity_Report|activity reports]]. Doing so places a load on the server however, which is why the setting is disabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Files and uploads==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum upload size===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide the largest size of file that students can upload to a course.  The site administrator can determine [[Site_policies#Maximum_uploaded_file_sizefile |sizes available]] for the teacher to select. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Editing teachers or other users may be allowed to upload files larger than the maximum size by giving them the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:ignorefilesizelimits|moodle/course:ignorefilesizelimits]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Completion tracking==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Completion  tracking must be enabled for [[Activity completion]]. [[Course completion]] criteria may also be based upon Activity completion values found in the activity&#039;s settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Guest access==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:guestaccess25.png|thumb|500px|Guest access settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to allow logged in users to access the course as a guest, and whether or not they need to enter a password. See [[Guest role|Guest role]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursegroups25.png|thumb|500px|Groups settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group mode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can define the [[Groups|group mode]] at the course level by a pull down menu. &amp;quot;[[Groups#No_groups|No groups]]&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;[[Groups#Separate_groups|Separate groups]]&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;[[Groups#Visible_groups|Visible groups]]&amp;quot; are the choices. The selected setting will be the default group mode for all activities defined within that course.  The group setting can affect what users see in the [[Participants]] list and who they can interact with in activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the group mode is &amp;quot;forced&amp;quot; at a course-level, then this particular group mode will be applied to every activity in that course. This will override any activities that may have a special group setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default grouping===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If [[Groupings|groupings]] are enabled, a default grouping for course activities and resources may be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Role renaming==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:rolerenaming.png|thumb|500px|Role renaming settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
You can rename the [[Roles|roles]] used in your course. For example, you may wish to rename the [[Teacher role]] as &amp;quot;Facilitator&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Tutor&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Guide&amp;quot;. These new role names will appear within the course. For example on the [[Participants|participants]] and the override permissions pages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the site administrator or a [[Manager |course manager]] may have changed the names or added new roles.  These names will appear and the teacher may rename them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can set course default settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course default settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of weeks/topics may be set for all courses on the site. The default value is 52.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing teachers from editing course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any/all of the following fields - course full name, short name, ID number and category, summary - may be locked to prevent teachers from editing them. To do so:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Access &#039;&#039;Site Administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the edit icon opposite the teacher role.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any/all of the capabilities [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changefullname|moodle/course:changefullname]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeshortname|moodle/course:changeshortname]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeidnumber|moodle/course:changeidnumber]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changecategory|moodle/course:changecategory]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary|moodle/course:changesummary]] from allow to not set.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button at the bottom of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/19ke-cvhnug Creating a Course and Course Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/rg6rUuBwITo Moodle 2 Administration Courses] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurseinstellungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del curso]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroaren_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres du cours]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:コース設定]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Groups_FAQ&amp;diff=114155</id>
		<title>Groups FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Groups_FAQ&amp;diff=114155"/>
		<updated>2014-08-14T09:27:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grouping users}}&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the &#039;groups mode&#039; setting?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have several classes/groups working  in a single course with different (or the same) teacher. Groups mode is a way of filtering the students so that work and grades can be accessed separately. See [[Groups]] for more information. There are three different groups modes – No groups, Separate Groups, Visible Groups. In ‘Separate groups’ mode, each group can only see their own group – other groups are invisible. In ‘Visible groups’ mode, each group works in their own group, but can also see other groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers are normally able to see other teachers&#039; groups&#039;s activities as well as their own unless the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:accessallgroups]] has been set to &amp;quot;prevent&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the difference between a cohort and a group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A group exists only within a course. You might have a class 10B for example which you want to enrol in course 1 and course 2. The group would need to be created in both courses  and its members enrolled separately in both courses. [[Cohorts]] are groups of users created by admin which can then be brought in &amp;quot;en masse&amp;quot; to courses. So if class 10B is created as a cohort by admin, then it can be selected in those courses where enrolment via cohort has been enabled. (For more information on creating and using cohorts, see here: [[Cohorts]]) Once members of a cohort have been added to a course, they can be included in a group, either by using the &amp;quot;auto create groups&amp;quot; feature or by adding the members to an empty or pre-created group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the &#039;force&#039; setting?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If force is set to yes, then all activities are group activities. This overrides any settings for individual activities.  If force is set to no, then activities are only group activities if they have been set to group mode.  In this case, each activity requires to be set to group mode individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I automatically add users to a group at the same time that I enroll them via a csv file?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes.  One of the optional field names that can be uploaded in the flat file is &amp;quot;group1, group2, etc&amp;quot;. The  group  must be associated to the corresponding course and the course short name used in the field course1. If the group doesn&#039;t already exist then Moodle will create the group. Here is an example of a portion of a csv file that would enroll students into a group entitled &#039;Class A&#039; within a course entitled &#039;Astro1&#039;. (Note that you can assign students to groups using this file even if they are already enrolled in Moodle, as you can select to update the user details when uploading the file.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 username, password, firstname, lastname, email, course1, group1,...&lt;br /&gt;
     jdoe, changeme, Jane, Doe, jdoe@email.org, Astro1, Class A,...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I assign a teacher to a group? Can a teacher be in more than one group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign a teacher to a group in exactly the same way that you assign a student to a group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I restrict a teacher to view only information about the groups that they are in?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Separate Groups mode, the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:accessallgroups|moodle/site:accessallgroups]] may be used to restrict access to all groups in a particular context. If this capability is removed from the teacher role (either within a course or globally if appropriate) then they will only see the students they teach when accessing the gradebook for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this for all teachers globally:&lt;br /&gt;
#Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the editing teacher role;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click to edit the role&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Show advanced button&lt;br /&gt;
#Type in the search box &#039;&#039;accessallgroups&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#When it appears, click &#039;&#039;Prevent&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this within a course:&lt;br /&gt;
#Course administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&lt;br /&gt;
#Type &#039;&#039;accessallgroups&#039;&#039; into the filter&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the X to remove from the editing teacher (Teacher) role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What determines whether students can see a teacher&#039;s profile?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A student can see the profile of all teachers that are members of their group or that have edit rights. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I have two groups that meet on different days. Can I set up activities for different times for the two groups?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use [[Groupings]] to achieve this to some degree. If you are using Moodle&#039;s [[Quiz]] you can set different times for different groups using the Group override settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I use the same groups for more than one course?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not directly, although there are some workarounds to accomplish this. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the [[Import_groups]] Import tool to import a file with the groups and settings (though not memberships). &lt;br /&gt;
* Create the groups by import or manually with enrollment keys on them and give the students group enrolment keys to enrol themselves into the right group for each course. &lt;br /&gt;
* Admins and managers can enrol users in bulk via File Upload or [[Cohorts]] to include group membership.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make a template with the enrolments and groups and restore it to a new course with user data.&lt;br /&gt;
* Create a master course with all the students enrolled and in the correct groups, and then to make each of the courses a metacourse based on that master course. Note that metacourses do not carry over group enrolments. See the documentation on [[Metacourses]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can a student be a member of more than one group? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, a student can be in more than one group.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If one student is in a group, do all students have to be in some group?===&lt;br /&gt;
No, a student does not have to belong to any group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If I have several groups, can I make a specific activity  or resource visible to just one of those groups?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can organise groups into [[Groupings|groupings]], then assign an activity (or resource) to a particular grouping.&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to show a resource (such as a file or folder) to only one group then Make sure that you admin has enabled &amp;quot;available for group members only&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Development&amp;gt;Experimental&#039;&#039; and then see [[Available for group members only]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In any version of Moodle you can make a forum post visible to just one group. You must first select that specific group from the dropdown and post the message to that group (rather than to &amp;quot;all participants&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I have one set of groups for Activity A and another set of groups for Activity B?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create two different [[Groupings|groupings]] (a grouping is a set of groups), and assign different groupings to the two activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is it possible to view all the groups in a course as a list to print out?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The groups overview page in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039; provides a table listing groups, group members and a user count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===When I try to add a student, they are always added to the first group, whichever group I select?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure that the students name does not include any punctuation. There is also a workaround – give each group a temporary name at the start of the alphabet, put your students in the group and then rename the group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I delete a group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After clicking, &amp;quot;Groups&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Course administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Groups..&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the group that you want to delete.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Delete selected group&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I import a list of students into a group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I sort students automatically into groups during enrolment?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can make use of [[Enrolment key|enrolment keys]]. Set an enrolment key in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Course administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Enrolment methods&amp;gt;Self enrolment&#039;&#039; (to enforce the enrolment key dialogue form when students enrol). That key is only for students who should not be in a group and to keep out any unwanted students. Then in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Course administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Groups&#039;&#039; you create your groups and  add a different enrolment key for each group. When a student enrols, using an enrolment key that is connected to a certain group, the student will automatically be part of that group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I change the sort order of the participants?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The admin can change the &amp;quot;fullnamedisplay&amp;quot; variable which will affect the sort order of participants for the entire Moodle site.  This can be found in the [[Site administration block]] under Security&amp;gt;Site Policies&amp;gt;Full name format. The default is First+Surname, with First, and Surname+First as options.  Some language packs have other options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the difference between a group and a grouping?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Groups versus groupings forum post http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=131905. A grouping can be thought of as a category of groups.  A grouping is a meta group.  Student membership to a &amp;quot;grouping&amp;quot; can only happen by their membership to a group that is associated with the grouping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is an orphan group?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An orphan group is a group that does not belong to any grouping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there any way to enable students to choose a group?===&lt;br /&gt;
There is a contributed module [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_choicegroup| ChoiceGroup] which will do this. See also on youtube:[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JQFaDLtHZdY&amp;amp;feature=player_embedded|  this screencast]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I view the participants list for just one group?===&lt;br /&gt;
For this, you need Groups mode switched ON at course level in Course settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Activity modules and groups==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different activity modules vary as to how they treat groups – some have better support for groups than others! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general if you have questions about how an activity supports groups, you’re advised to post in the forum for the activity module, and not the groups forum. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Which activity modules do NOT support group mode?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All activity modules support the use of group mode apart from Glossary, Lesson, and SCORM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What happens if I switch an activity from being in non-groups mode to being in groups mode?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This depends on the activity module in question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For forums, posts made before the forum is put into groups mode are visible to all students after you have put the forum into group mode. However students cannot reply to these posts if they have no group (i.e. blank). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What happens if I change the groups for an activity in groups mode e.g. if I move a student from one group to another?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again this depends on the activity module. You may find that grades or activity logs are lost, so check for the specific activity module first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I post a message in a forum that only one group can see?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you click &#039;Add a new topic&#039;, you need to choose the group from the Separate groups drop-down menu at the top left. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===As a teacher I want to put the same post in each group&#039;s forum with students able to reply to that post. How can I do this?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to post the same message into the forum for each group. There is currently no way to do this in one go if you want students to be able to reply to your post. If you don&#039;t mind students not being able to reply, then you can of course just post the message to all participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I hide an activity/resource in the course from anyone who is not assigned to a group?===&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the [[Available for group members only]] experimental setting for allowing access to an activity/resource only to participants who are assigned to a group. If no participant on the course site is assigned to a group, ticking the &#039;Available for group members only&#039; will effectively hide the activity/resource from everyone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Groupings FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=320 Groups forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/amyQjAESkZM Moodle Forum Types and Group Mode] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ des groupes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:FAQ по группам]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Gruppen_FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Grupos FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Groups&amp;diff=114154</id>
		<title>Groups</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Groups&amp;diff=114154"/>
		<updated>2014-08-14T09:26:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grouping users}}&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can organise users into groups within the course or within particular activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why use groups?==&lt;br /&gt;
*You are a teacher in a course where you have several classes and you want to filter your activities and gradebook so you only see one class at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
*You are a teacher sharing a course with other teachers and you want to filter your activities and gradebook so you don’t see the students from your colleagues’ classes.&lt;br /&gt;
*You want to  allocate a particular activity or resource to just one class or set of users and you don’t want others to see it. See [[Groupings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group levels==&lt;br /&gt;
A group or grouping can be used on two levels:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Course level - The group mode defined at the course level is the default mode for all activities defined within that course.  To use groups you need first to set a group mode in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Course administration&amp;gt;Edit settings.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Activity level - Each activity that supports groups can also have its own group mode defined. If the course  setting &amp;quot;Force group mode&amp;quot; is set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; then the option to define the group mode for individual activities is not available. If it is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, then the teacher may change the group mode:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:groupmodecourse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group modes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three group modes &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*No groups - There are no sub groups, everyone is part of one big community&lt;br /&gt;
*Separate groups - Each group can only see their own group, others are invisible.&lt;br /&gt;
*Visible groups - Each group works in their own group, but can also see other groups. (The other groups&#039; work is read-only.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, enabling either separate or visible groups on an assignment drop-box enables staff to filter the student submissions to see only those from a particular tutor group. With visible groups, students can see which other groups are doing the same activities as they are; with separate groups, they do not know which other groups are doing the same activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using groups with discussion forums allow teachers to restrict interaction between students. Separate groups mean only students in the same group can see and participate in discussions within a particular forum. Visible groups allow students to see other group&#039;s discussions, but only participate in their own group&#039;s discussions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a group==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Create group&#039; button in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Add a group name and optional description (displayed above the list of group members on the participants page), [[Enrolment key|enrolment key]] and picture (displayed on the participants page and next to forum posts)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the group to which you want to add participants, then click the &#039;Add/remove users button&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &amp;quot;Potential members&amp;quot; list, select the users you want to add to the group. Multiple users may be selected using the Crtl key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Add button to add the users to the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An optional group ID number (an advanced setting) may be added for matching the group against external systems. Group ID numbers are not displayed anywhere on the site. Within a course, all group ID numbers must be unique. Thus it&#039;s not possible to create a group with a duplicate group ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:groups.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Auto-create groups==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Groups may be created automatically via the &#039;Auto-create groups&#039; button in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;. To see all the settings, click the &#039;&#039;Expand all&#039;&#039; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:autocreategroups.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General===&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;naming scheme&#039;&#039;&#039; can be created automatically.  # is replaced by sequential numbers, and @ by letters.  For example:  &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Group @&#039;&#039; will create group with a naming scheme Group A, Group B, Group C . . .&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Group #&#039;&#039; will create group with a naming scheme Group 1, Group 2, Group 3 . . .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can specify if you would like to  create &lt;br /&gt;
*x number of Groups or &lt;br /&gt;
*each group contain x number of students&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:When selecting &#039;&#039;&#039;Members per group&#039;&#039;&#039; the &#039;&#039;&#039;Prevent last small group&#039;&#039;&#039; will allocate additional members to an existing group rather then create a new group with fewer members than x. This setting is found by clicking on the Show More link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group members===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Select members from ...&#039;&#039; allows you to choose from roles or available cohorts.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Specify&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Group/Member count&#039;&#039;&#039; work together.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The setting &#039;Select members from cohort&#039; lists all cohorts which users enrolled on the current course are part of. The number in brackets is the number of users enrolled on the course in that cohort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grouping===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create in grouping&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Grouping name&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to create a new grouping and allocate the new auto-created groups to be created to it.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to creating the groups, you can view the groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups and enrol plugins==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where groups are created automatically with enrol plugins such as  IMS Enterprise, members cannot be unenrolled manually via the groups screen inside a course. This has to be done from the plugin. Additionally, when group members are owned by a plugin like this, there is information below their name on the groups screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A overview of groups and groupings is available via the Overview tab in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Groups&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table may be filtered to display particular [[Groupings|groupings]] or groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/course:managegroups|Manage groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/site:accessallgroups|Access all groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/calendar:managegroupentries|Manage group calendar entries]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Upload users]] - for importing users into groups&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Enrolment key]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Available for group members only]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/amyQjAESkZM Moodle Forum Types and Group Mode] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Gruppen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Groupes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:グループ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Grupos]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Forum&amp;diff=114153</id>
		<title>Using Forum</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_Forum&amp;diff=114153"/>
		<updated>2014-08-14T09:24:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Forum}}&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can set the format of what the student sees under the introduction by selecting the forum type in [[Forum settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Views==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A single simple discussion===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students will see the text you have placed in the [[Adding/editing_a_forum#Forum_introduction|Forum introduction setting]] as the first post of the discussion. Below you will find the replies that have been posted.  In the example below, the student sees that their reply was rated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Forum homepage view Simple student mu.png|thumb|Student view of &amp;quot;A single simple discussion&amp;quot; forum type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Each person posts one discussion===&lt;br /&gt;
The view will be basically the same as in the previous case, the only difference being the &#039;Add a new discussion&#039; option. Viewing a forum page, the student will see the text you have written at the &#039;Forum introduction&#039; space while creating the forum, and, if there are any, the discussions that have been started. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Forum homepage view Single student mu.png|thumb|443px|Student view of &amp;quot;Each person posts one discussion&amp;quot; forum type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard forum for general use===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this forum type, students will see the introduction text in a separate space above the discussion field, in which you will see the information such as the title of the discussion (which means the forum&#039;s title), its author, the number of replies and the date of the last post. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:standardforum.png|thumb|467px|Student view of &amp;quot;Standard forum&amp;quot; type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question and Answer forum===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Q &amp;amp; A forum is best used when you have a particular question that you wish to have answered. In a Q and A forum, teachers post the question and students respond with possible answers. By default a Q and A forum requires students to post once before viewing other students&#039; postings. [[Using Forum#Question and Answer forum 2 |More details here]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:QA1.png|thumb|Inital view of Q&amp;amp;A forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:QA2.png|thumb|Students cannot see posts until they post]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[FIle:QA3.png|thumb|Other posts visible when editing time is over]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard forum displayed in blog-like format===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Bloglikeforum.png|thumb|450px|Blog like forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the upper right corner of the home forum screen (above the introduction), the student may see the options the teacher has set for [[Adding/editing_a_forum#Force_everyone_to_be_subscribed.3F|subscriptions to the forum]], and the &#039;Jump to&#039; field, with which you can &#039;jump&#039; to any part of the course. This is also place where the teacher will find the &amp;quot;Update this forum&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Display options==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:forumviewoptions.jpg|thumb|Reply display options]]A discussion thread may be displayed in four ways. Use the pull down menu at the top of each forum discussion to select a display type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Display replies flat, with oldest first&lt;br /&gt;
* Display replies flat, with newest first - The discussion will be displayed in one line and the chronological order from the newest to the oldest.  This is the same as the above, just a different sort order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Display replies in threaded form - Only the post starting the discussion will be displayed in its full form; replies will be reduced to the headlines (including information about its author and date of release) and organized chronologically; moreover, replies will be shifted towards the right so that only replies to the same post were in the same line.&lt;br /&gt;
* Display replies in nested form - All posts are displayed in their full forms; replies will be reduced to the headlines (including information about its author and date of release) and organized chronologically; moreover, replies will be shifted towards the right so that only replies to the same post were in the same line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:Forum Flat form mu.png|thumb|Flat Forum discussion, example from middle]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:Forum threaded form mu.png|thumb|Posts in threaded form]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:Forum nested form mu.png|thumb|&amp;quot;Nested reply example&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Forum posting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default content of &#039;&#039;&#039;Subject&#039;&#039;&#039; is usually &#039;Re: &amp;lt;the name of the &#039;parent&#039; post&amp;gt;&#039;. You can change it though. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When writing text in Moodle there are several formats you can choose to produce your text, depending on your expertise and the type of browser you are using. Please refer to [[Formatting text]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sharing images through forums ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When an image is &amp;quot;attached&amp;quot; as a file to a forum message, it is immediately displayed full size after the message (i.e. no need to click on an attachment).  This an excellent way of sharing images without having to go through the process of uploading them as files and linking them from within web pages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Images may be dragged and dropped into the box as well as uploading via the &amp;quot;add&amp;quot; link and the [[File picker]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumdragdrop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sharing sound and video through forums===&lt;br /&gt;
*If multimedia filters are enabled, a sound file (mp3) or accepted video file can be attached and it will be embedded into the forum post in an appropriate player.&lt;br /&gt;
*As with images in the previous section, multimedia files may be dragged and dropped from the desktop instead of uploaded via the [[File picker]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Post length===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra-long posts cause problems when doing a forum search and can be difficult to read on screen. Rather than creating a very long post, consider copying and pasting the text into a text file and add it as an attachment to your forum post. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Post editing time limit===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a time limit for editing posts, usually 30 minutes. It is set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; [[Site policies]]&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Using Moodle forum discussion [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=5367 The philosophy underlying &amp;quot;no editing after 30 minutes&amp;quot;] includes reasons why it is a good idea to have a time limit for editing posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail now===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A mail now checkbox is available for anyone with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:manageactivities|capability to manage course activities]], normally teachers and admins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Checking the &amp;quot;Mail now&amp;quot; box results in a notification being sent immediately (i.e. when the [[Cron|cron]] next runs) to everyone subscribed to the forum, rather than after the post editing time limit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: For users who have enabled email digests in their profile, the notification is NOT sent separately from other forum post notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting forum posts==&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &#039;&#039;mod/forum:exportdiscussion&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;mod/forum:exportownpost&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;mod/forum:exportpost&#039;&#039; permission can export forum posts to any portfolio the administrator has enabled:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportforum.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moving a discussion==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers and other users with the [[Capabilities/mod/forum:movediscussions|capability to move discussions]] can move a discussion to any other forum in the course for which they have appropriate rights.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the arrow in the &#039;Move this discussion to...&#039; dropdown menu in the top right corner of the page and select a destination forum.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Move button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Moving a forum post will display incorrect results in the [[Participation_report|course participation report]] for the affected forums. For example, take a student who posted in forum A and had their post moved to forum B. In the course participation report the student will still be listed has having made a post in forum A, but will not be listed as having made a post yet in forum B.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Guidelines for Teaching and Learning Forums==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you decide to use a discussion forum as an activity in an e-learning environment, it is important to be aware that your time will be needed in some sense in order to make the activity successful. If your goal is to encourage discussion, the forum will only work if: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) &#039;&#039;&#039;participants feel there is a need/reason to participate and they will gain something from the experience.&#039;&#039;&#039; Incentives for learning, gathering support, etc. should be explored and encouraged early on in order to clearly convey the purpose of the forum to others. Anyone considering offering grades or marks for participation is advised to think very carefully about the difference between quantity and quality of discussions in forums.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) a sense of community and purpose can be fostered amongst participants. This sense of community can be fostered through tutor/teacher initiative and scaffolding, or primarily through the students/participants themselves depending on the intentions of the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Selecting forum type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has four kinds of forums each with a slightly different [[Viewing a forum|layout]] and purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Which of the forums will best suit your needs for a particular activity? In order to answer this question, it is useful to think how you might lead such a discussion in a face-to-face environment. Would you throw the question out to the class and sit back to observe them in their answers? Or would you break them up into smaller groups first and ask them to have discussions with a partner before bringing them back to the main group? Or perhaps you would like to keep them focused on a particular aspect of a question and ensure that they do not wander away from the topic at hand? All of the above approaches are both valid and useful, depending on your learning outcomes, and you can replicate all of them in Moodle forums.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A standard forum for general use===&lt;br /&gt;
The standard forum ([[Viewing_a_forum#Standard_forum_for_general_use|view here]]) probably most useful for large discussions that you intend to monitor/guide or for social forums that are student led. This does not mean that you need to make a new posting for each reply in each topic, although, in order to ensure that the discussion does not get &#039;out of control&#039;, you may need to be prepared to spend a significant amount of time finding the common threads amongst the various discussions and weaving them together. Providing overall remarks for particular topics can also be a key aspect of your responsibilities in the discussion. Alternatively, you could ask students to summarize discussion topics at agreed points, once a week or when a thread comes to an agreed conclusion. Such a learner-centred approach may be particularly useful once the online community has been established and, perhaps, when you have modeled the summarizing process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A single simple discussion=== &lt;br /&gt;
The simple forum ([[Viewing_a_forum#A_single_simple_discussion|view here]]) is most useful for short/time-limited discussion on a single subject or topic. This kind of forum is very productive if you are interested in keeping students focused on a particular issue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Each person posts one discussion===&lt;br /&gt;
This forum ([[Viewing_a_forum#Each_person_posts_one_discussion|view here]]) is most useful when you want to achieve a happy medium between a large discussion and a short and focused discussion. A single discussion topic per person allows students a little more freedom than a single discussion forum, but not as much as a standard forum where each student can create as many topics as he or she wishes. Successful forums of this selection can be active, yet focused, as students are not limited in the number of times they can respond to others within threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question and Answer forum=== &lt;br /&gt;
The Q &amp;amp; A forum ([[Viewing_a_forum#Question_and_Answer_forum|view here]]) is best used when you have a particular question that you wish to have answered. In a Q and A forum, tutors post the question and students respond with possible answers. By default a Q and A forum requires students to post once before viewing other students&#039; postings. After the initial posting and once the editing time (usually 30 minutes) has elapsed, students can view and respond to others&#039; postings. This feature allows equal initial posting opportunity among all students, thus encouraging original and independent thinking. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; Students do not see the &amp;quot;add a new question&amp;quot; button in the Q &amp;amp; A forum. If you wish students to be able to add new questions, they need to be given the capability [[Capabilities/mod/forum:addquestion|mod/forum:addquestion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Standard forum displayed in blog-like format===&lt;br /&gt;
This forum  behaves in the same way as the default standard forum for general use, allowing users to start their own discussions. However, it displays differently in that the first post of each discussion is displayed (as in a blog) so that users can read it and then choose to respond by clicking the &amp;quot;Discuss this topic&amp;quot; button bottom right of the post.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Tips for Question and Answer====&lt;br /&gt;
When the Question and Answer mode is selected, Moodle hides the replies to the initial thread post by the teacher but not the entire forum itself. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Post each question as a thread in the forum and then have students post replies to the question. In this fashion, Moodle will protect the replies from being viewable (subject to the caveat above) by other students but allow the initial post/thread visible for reply by all students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Do not post the question in the forum summary because every student answer will become a thread and visible to all students. In this scenario, it may appear as if the Question and Answer forum is not working correctly, since the new initial posts in the thread are intentionally designed not to be hidden, just their replies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If you have set up groups for your forum the facilitator needs to post a question to each of the groups and not to &#039;all participants&#039; as questions asked of all participants (students) are able to be read by ALL students. Questions posed to group members are only visible to those group members and replies are only visible once a group member has posted a message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Forum subscription==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person is &#039;&#039;&#039;subscribed&#039;&#039;&#039; to a forum it means that they will be notified (according to their [[Messaging settings]] preferences) of every subsequent post in that forum. Posters have 30 minutes by default to edit their post before it is sent though this time limit can be changed by an administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People can usually choose whether or not they want to be subscribed to each forum. However, if a teacher forces subscription on a particular forum then this choice is taken away and everyone in the class will get notified.This is especially useful in the News forum and in forums towards the beginning of the course (before everyone has worked out that they can subscribe to these emails themselves).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that even if you force subscriptions every user can elect not to  be notified in  [[Messaging settings]], or elect to have all email sent once a day in a digest contain either all posts or simply the subject headings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choosing &#039;&#039;Everyone can choose to be subscribed&#039;&#039; enables you to check (and modify) the number of subscribers (&#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Show/edit current subscribers&#039;&#039;) and to subscribe to (or unsubscribe from) the forum (&#039;Subscribe to this forum&#039; / &#039;Unsubscribe from this forum&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An overview of your forum subscriptions is available on the forums index page e.g. http://moodle.org/mod/forum/index.php?id=5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Concepts for use in forums==&lt;br /&gt;
===Participation and Scaffolding ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whilst one of the great advantages of e-learning is the flexibility it affords participants, this does not mean that days or weeks should pass without response and discussion in a forum (unless it is appropriate for it to do so). This is perhaps most especially true at the beginning of a course or programme when students and tutors are new to each other and in need of welcome messages/encouragement. Whilst e-learning, and discussions in particular, can support learning that is not always tutor/teacher-centred, your role will be important, especially as an online community begins to develop. It is during these initial stages of introductory material that a group of students can become a community of participants who begin to grow in their understandings of course material and individual contributions to the knowledge construction process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the discussions progress and learners become accustomed to the mechanics and the tone of the forums then there are key ways in which your input can be reduced, thereby helping to foster a community that is less dependent on the tutor/teacher. Even then, however, you will probably want to be a presence in the discussions although you may choose to be one of many contributors rather than the font of all wisdom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Commitment and Participation===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ask yourself if&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# you wish to have involvement in the forum or if you want the students to lead and own the space&lt;br /&gt;
# you want the forum to add value to the face to face environment or have a life of its own in its own right outside the lecture theatre/classroom or seminar room&lt;br /&gt;
# you are prepared to make appropriate contributions to the discussion in order to: &lt;br /&gt;
## encourage discussion if students are quiet&lt;br /&gt;
## help shape ideas if students begin to wander off-task&lt;br /&gt;
## your role will be defined as discussions/a course progresses &lt;br /&gt;
## you will explicitly but gradually relinquish control of the discussions&lt;br /&gt;
## you will encourage and support learners to share control of discussions(for example you might ask a learner/group of learners to summarise contributions to a discussion thread/topic or you might ask learners to initiate discussion topics)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Student Centered Forums===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the growing popularity of social networking software like Facebook, Bebo, MySpace and the like, students are leaving schools and coming to Higher and Further Education with a new technological sophistication and with new expectations for communication. And as school, colleges and universities recognise that reflective and life long learning are significant goals in education, student centered learning and the creation of student centered spaces online are also gaining credence in educational settings. We know that effective learning requires access to social and academic networks for both study material and emotional support; as such, online communities can offer a holistic knowledge construction and support mechanism and recognize that affective activity is effective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Social forums, often called ‘Virtual Cafes’ or ‘Common Rooms’ can be set up for courses or for programmes, depending on the student need. Such spaces provide a common area for students to come together and discuss unlimited topics, including social activities and educational ideas. They are supportive spaces for students, most successful with large first and second year courses where students would not otherwise have the opportunity to communicate with others outside their own tutorial group. It is arguable that students will experience a greater sense of community within and a sense of belonging to an educational institution or individual department having had the experience and convenience of the social forum on their course; this could arguably have implications for retention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These spaces are typically highly active, especially in first term. Depending on your institution, they are usually self monitored by students, who understand that the same ‘rules’ and ‘netiquette’ that apply to them within any computing space, also apply in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The News Forum===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle courses automatically generate a [[News forum]] which defaults to automatically subscribe all participants in a course. The name of the News Forum can be changed to something more appropriate, such as ‘Important Announcements’ or the like. This is a useful feature and many use this forum in a Moodle course to announce exam dates, times or changes to exams, lectures or seminars, as well as important information about course work throughout a term or special announcements relating to events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Teacher/Tutor forums===&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher/tutor-only forum may be added to a course by creating a hidden forum. Teachers are able to view hidden course activities whereas students cannot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Some forum suggestions to consider==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If your course is at a distance, if your face to face time is limited, or if you just wish to foster a sense of community in your Moodle course which supplements your face to face course, it is good practice to begin with a welcome or introductory message or thread in one of your forums. This welcome or introduction from you invites participants, for example, to post some specific details to introduce themselves to you and their peers. This can be your icebreaker or you can have an icebreaker separately.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you have two questions for participants to answer, starting the two strands or topics within the forum itself will both help learners to see where to put their responses, and remind them to answer all parts of your question.&lt;br /&gt;
#Remember that you are communicating in an environment that does not have the benefit of verbal tone, eye contact, body language and the like. Careful consideration of your communication is, therefore, necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
#Postings to a forum are always written but they can take different forms and you may wish to consider what form best suits the activity. For instance, you might choose to articulate a form of contribution in order to be explicit. Thus you might say, &#039;This is a think-aloud forum in which, together, we will try to tease out ideas and possibilities&#039; or &#039;This is a formal forum in which you are invited to share your ideas on (topic)&#039; and, where you select the latter, you might have already suggested learners plan those ideas offline or in another kind of activity within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create a forum where only the teacher can start discussions, but the students can only reply. Each thread you start contains an essay question (or several similar ones). The students make a bullet point plan for the essay and post it as a reply. This works well as a revision strategy as the students can see how others have approached the same task. Once everyone has posted their plan, you can start a discussion as to which plans seem better and why. Creating a scale to use for rating the posts can be useful so that the students can see how helpful other people think their effort were. (Note: At this time, there is no option to hide the &amp;quot;Add new discussion topic&amp;quot; button, so you need to tell your students not to start discussion threads, but to only reply to threads started by the teacher. If you only need one thread, then you can use the &amp;quot;a single simple discussion&amp;quot; format and the &amp;quot;Add new discussion topic&amp;quot; button is not available to the students.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading forums===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can use the [[Forum ratings|ratings]] [[Scales|scales]] to [[Grades|grade]] student activities in a forum. There are several methods for calculating the grade for a forum that can be found in the [[Adding/editing_a_forum#Grade|Forum settings under grades]]. There are 5 ways to [[Adding/editing_a_forum#Aggregate_type|aggregate ratings]] automatically to calculate a forum grade for the [[Gradebook]]. These include: Average, Max, Min, Count and Sum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Forum ratings allow users to evaluate posts in a forum==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Forum ratings use [[Scales]] to standardize the reporting of performance. A forum rating can be included as part of a student&#039;s [[Grades|grade]].  For example, a teacher might use a custom rating scale in a forum and allow students to rate forum posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Forum ratings must be allowed and the potential rater must have [[Roles|role]] permission. Teachers by default have this ability.  The teacher role is also able to give permission to a [[Student|student role]] in a specific forum to be able to assign a rating to a post. Forum settings and [[Forum_permissions#Enabling_students_to_rate_posts| Enabling student ratings]] has more information.     &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to use===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Forum rating example1 mu.png|thumb|Teacher view of a previously rated student post]]When rating is allowed, the qualified user will see &amp;quot;Rate this post&amp;quot; and a pull down menu after an entry (not their own).  The menu displays a [[Scales|scale]] that the forum creator selected in the [[Adding/editing_a_forum#Grade|Forum grade settings]]. The user can rate more than one post at a time.  When finished they should click the &amp;quot;submit my ratings&amp;quot; button at the bottom of the page.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AJAX forum rating===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Forum rating can be made more user-friendly with the use of AJAX. Users can rate forum posts almost instantly without needing to scroll to the bottom of the page and click the &amp;quot;Send in my latest ratings&amp;quot; button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AJAX forum rating requires AJAX to be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; [[AJAX and Javascript settings|AJAX and Javascript]]&#039;&#039; and by users in their [[Edit profile|user profile]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Separate and connected knowing===&lt;br /&gt;
You can  rate forum posts with the [[Separate_and_Connected_Knowing| Separate and Connected Knowing]] scale here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Good Practice and shared discussions===&lt;br /&gt;
*There are lots of discussions about Forum good use and Forum assessment in the Teaching Strategies Forum http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=41.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A useful discussion about Forum assessment can be found here http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/amyQjAESkZM Moodle Forum Types and Group Mode] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=116 Forum module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moodleblog.onet/?page_id=148 Peer Assessment using a Moodle Forum] blog post with screencast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=5367 The philosophy underlying &amp;quot;no editing after 30 minutes&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66008 Best Practices for grading discussions]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=88000 Two Courses, One Forum?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=93304 Using a forum for 1 to 1 teaching]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=95470 Technicalities of managing a Forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=67360 Role names showing next to posting photos]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Forum nutzen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Afficher un forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:フォーラムの閲覧]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Usando Foro]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Forum_settings&amp;diff=114152</id>
		<title>Forum settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Forum_settings&amp;diff=114152"/>
		<updated>2014-08-14T09:22:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Forum}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and editing a forum==&lt;br /&gt;
#With the editing turned on, in the section you wish to add your forum, click the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu )and choose &#039;&#039;Forum&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will take you to the forum settings page titled &amp;quot;Adding a new forum&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can access an existing forum by clicking the configure icon or clicking on the forum and then &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fileforumgeneral26.png|thumb|436px|The General settings, expanded by default.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Forum name===&lt;br /&gt;
A short name of the forum (e.g. &amp;quot;Favourite colour&amp;quot;), which will be displayed on the course homepage.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Provide instructions for your students here so they are clear what they have to do. Click the icon top left to expand the toolbars drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on course page===&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this will display the description on the course page just below the link to the forum.&lt;br /&gt;
===Forum type===&lt;br /&gt;
There are five forum types to choose from:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A single simple discussion - A single topic discussion developed on one page, which is useful for short focused discussions (cannot be used with separate groups)&lt;br /&gt;
*Standard forum for general use - An open forum where anyone can start a new topic at any time; this is the best general-purpose forum&lt;br /&gt;
*Each person posts one discussion - Each person can post exactly one new discussion topic (everyone can reply to them though); this is useful when you want each student to start a discussion about, say, their reflections on the week&#039;s topic, and everyone else responds to these&lt;br /&gt;
*Q and A Forum - Instead of initiating discussions participants pose a question in the initial post of a discussion. Students may reply with an answer, but they will not see the replies of other Students to the question in that discussion until they have themselves replied to the same discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
*Standard forum displayed in a blog-like format&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: [[News forum]] is a special type of forum that is automatically created with a new course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Attachments and word count==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:attachmentsandwordcount.png|thumb|292px|Attachments and word count settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum attachment size===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum file size that may be attached to a forum post will first be determined by the Moodle site settings. The teacher may want a smaller size limit for the forum. Server file capacity, student downloading speeds and discouraging images in a document centered discussion are a few reasons to limit file size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of attachments===&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of attachments a user can add to their forum post (from 0 to 100) can be specified here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display word count===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &amp;quot;Display word count&amp;quot;  is enabled, then the number of words in forum posts will be shown at the bottom of each post.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription and tracking==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:subscriptionandtracking.png|thumb|267px|Subscription and tracking settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Subscription mode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user is subscribed to a forum it means that they will receive notification (via popup and/or email, depending on the user’s messaging settings preferences) of each new posting. By default, posts are recorded about 30 minutes after the post was first written. Depending upon the email settings of each forum member, they may be sent an email immediately after the 30 minute edit window is closed, or in a batch at a time fixed by the site administrator (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People can usually choose whether or not they want to be subscribed to each forum. However, the teacher can choose to force subscription on a particular forum then all course users will be subscribed automatically, even those that enrol at a later time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 subscription mode options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional subscription - Participants can choose whether to be subscribed&lt;br /&gt;
* Forced subscription - Everyone is subscribed and cannot unsubscribe&lt;br /&gt;
* Auto subscription - Everyone is subscribed initially but can choose to unsubscribe at any time&lt;br /&gt;
* Subscription disabled - Subscriptions are not allowed.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The subscription mode and subscribe or unsubscribe links appear in&#039;&#039; Navigation&amp;gt;Forum administration&#039;&#039; when viewing the forum.  teachers can quickly change the mode via the &#039;Subscription mode&#039; options and view the current subscribers via the &#039;Show/edit current subscribers&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tips:&lt;br /&gt;
* Forcing everyone to subscribe is especially useful in the news forum and in forums towards the beginning of the course (before everyone has worked out that they can subscribe to these emails themselves).&lt;br /&gt;
* Changing the setting from &amp;quot;Yes, initially&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; will not unsubscribe existing users; it will only affect those who enrol in the course in the future. Similarly changing &amp;quot;Yes, initially&amp;quot; will not subscribe existing course users but only those enrolling later.&lt;br /&gt;
* There is also a &amp;quot;Subscriptions not allowed&amp;quot; setting which prevents Students from subscribing to a Forum. Teachers may choose to subscribe to a forum if they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Read tracking for this forum?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Read tracking&amp;quot; for a forum allows users to track read and unread forum posts. &lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:forum administration.png|thumb|325px|Don&#039;t track unread posts link]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options for this setting:&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - Students can turn tracking on or off for the forum via a link &#039;Track / Don&#039;t track unread posts&#039; in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration&#039;&#039;, or via their profile &#039;Forum Tracking&#039; option.&lt;br /&gt;
* Off - It is not possible to track unread forum posts&lt;br /&gt;
* Forced - Tracking is always on in this forum, regardless of user preference or setting. No link in is present in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration&#039;&#039;. This setting is only available when the &#039;Allow forced read tracking&#039; administrative setting is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==RSS==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default and will only appear if RSS has been enabled sitewide and for forums)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:rss25.png|thumb|306px|RSS settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===RSS feed for this activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This turns RSS on or off for this forum. When set to “None,” RSS is disabled. When set to “Discussions,” the RSS feed will send out new discussions to subscribers. When set to “Posts,” the RSS feed will send out any new posts to subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: [[RSS feeds]] must be enabled for the site and for forums in order for the RSS settings to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of RSS recent articles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This number sets the number of articles that go out via RSS. If this number is set to 5, then the 5 most recent articles will be sent to subscribers. As new posts (or discussions) get added, the oldest post/discussion gets replaced on the RSS feed. If your forum gets a lot of posts every day, you will want to set this number high.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrative cron (admin/cron.php) must run after the forum is created and posts or discussions have been made.  Otherwise the user will receive an error &amp;quot;Error reading RSS data&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Post threshold for blocking==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:postthresholdforblocking.png|thumb|389px|Post threshold for blocking settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Time period for blocking===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here the time period in which can be blocked from posting more than a given number of posts. (To make a user exempt, give them the capability &#039;&#039;mod/forum:postwithoutthrottling&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
===Post threshold for blocking===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the number of posts here that users may add before they are blocked.&lt;br /&gt;
===Post threshold for warning===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the number of posts here after which users will be warned they are about to be blocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the category in which this forum will appear if ratings are enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ratings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ratings25.png|thumb|480px|Ratings settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Roles with permissions to rate===&lt;br /&gt;
Forum posts can be rated using a [[Scales|scale]]. By default, only teachers can rate forum posts, though students can be given permission to do so if desired (see Forum permissions below). This is a useful tool for giving students participation grades. Any ratings given in the forum are recorded in the [[Gradebook|gradebook]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Aggregate type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set an aggregate type, in other words, decide how all the ratings given to posts in a forum are combined to form the final grade (for each post and for the whole forum activity).See [[Ratings]] for an explanation of aggregate types and which one is best for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Restrict ratings to items with dates in this range===&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can allow only posts within a certain date range to be rated. This is useful if the teacher wants to keep students focused on the most recent content and maintain a specific pace within the forum or course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:cm25.png|thumb|392px|Common module settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] for more information, but note the details below relating specifically to use of forums with groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group mode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;group mode&#039;&#039;&#039; setting has three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# No groups&lt;br /&gt;
# Separate groups - each group can only see their own group; others are invisible&lt;br /&gt;
# Visible groups - each group works in their own group, but can also see other groups&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the group mode is set to separate groups:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:groupsforum.gif|403px|thumb|Adding a new discussion topic to a forum set to separate groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
* Teachers are given the option of adding a new discussion topic for all participants or for a selected group. If a teacher adds a new discussion topic for a selected group, then only group members can reply to it. If a teacher adds a new discussion topic for all participants, then students can&#039;t reply to it. (This is to ensure that groups are kept separate.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Students can only start discussions for their own group.&lt;br /&gt;
* Students can only reply to discussions started by other group members or discussions for their own group started by a teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the group mode is set to visible groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teachers are given the option of adding a new discussion topic for all participants or for a selected group. If a teacher adds a new discussion topic for a selected group, then only group members can reply to it.&lt;br /&gt;
* Students can only start discussions for their own group.&lt;br /&gt;
* Students can only reply to discussions started by other group members or teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers, and other users with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:accessallgroups|moodle/site:accessallgroups]] set to allow, can view and post in all forum discussions, regardless of the group mode setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: Single simple discussions cannot be set to separate groups (as this feature is not implemented). Instead, a standard forum should be used, with the teacher copying and pasting the same discussion topic for each separate group. If required, a permissions override may be set to prevent students from starting new discussions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locally assigned roles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Locally assigned roles&#039;&#039; selected users can be given additional roles in the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Forum moderator===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A student can be given the rights to moderate a forum by assigning them the role of non-editing teacher in the forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Locally assigned roles&#039;&#039; click on student&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the student from the potential users list on the right, and use the Add button to add them to the existing users list on the left. Multiple users may be selected by holding down the Apple or Ctrl key whilst clicking on the users&#039; names. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[Forum moderator role]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Forum permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Role permissions for the activity can be changed in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Common permissions changes include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enabling students to rate posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Allow icon (+) opposite the capability to rate posts and allow the role of student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Archiving a forum===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A forum can be closed / archived so that students may no longer start new discussions, nor add replies, but can still read all the discussions by clicking the Prevent icon (X) for the student role for the capabilities &#039;Start new discussions&#039; and &#039;Reply to posts&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Guests and posting in a forum===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are certain things, such as posting in a forum, that guests are never allowed to do, despite the permissions interface suggesting otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The guest role has some special functionality, for example when a guest user attempts to post in a forum, they obtain the message &amp;quot;Sorry, guests are not allowed to post. Would you like to log in now with a full user account?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Note: If guests don&#039;t obtain the  &amp;quot;Sorry, guests are not allowed to post&amp;quot; message because they have no reply link, then self enrolment needs enabling in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish guests to be able to post in a forum, you can use the [[Forum poster role]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose whether or not to track unread posts in their profile settings under &#039;Forum tracking&#039;. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Yes: highlight new posts for me&lt;br /&gt;
* No: don&#039;t keep track of posts I have seen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user chooses &#039;Yes: highlight new posts for me&#039; and the forum administrator has set the &#039;Read tracking for this forum?&#039; to On or Optional then the user will have new posts highlighted for them.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:forumtracking1.png|thumb|296px|left|Unread posts alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The posts will be highlighted in the following places:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* My home page&lt;br /&gt;
* Course page&lt;br /&gt;
* Within the forum itself&lt;br /&gt;
* In forum discussion threads&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:forumtracking2.png|thumb|447px|left|Click to mark as read]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The forum module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039; and, for &#039;Maximum time to edit posts&#039;, in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use email address in reply===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, a user&#039;s email is set as the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications (unless the user has hidden their email address in their profile) so that recipients can choose to reply personally rather than via the forum. To set noreply@yourmoodlesite.org as &#039;From&#039; address for all forum notification emails, untick the forum_replytouser checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Long and short posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The long and short post setting determine how forum posts on the site front page, social format course pages, and user profiles are displayed. (Note: There is currently an unresolved issue - &amp;quot;Site news - forum length setting has no effect for certain users&amp;quot; - MDL-4781.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enabling timed posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Timed forum posts may be enabled i.e. having the option to set a display start and end date for a new discussion. Timed posts can then be created by users with the [[Capabilities/mod/forum:viewhiddentimedposts|capability to view hidden timed posts]] (normally admins and teachers).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum time to edit posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This specifies the amount of time people have to re-edit forum postings, glossary comments etc. Usually 30 minutes is a good value. The setting may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Read tracking===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the default &#039;Read tracking&#039; selection when creating new forums. If &#039;Forced&#039; is selected, the &#039;Allow forced read tracking&#039; checkbox (below) must be ticked, otherwise &#039;Optional&#039; will be the default setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow forced read tracking===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this option set, &amp;quot;Forced&amp;quot; will be an option for &amp;quot;Read tracking&amp;quot; when creating or editing Forums. Forced forums have read tracking enabled regardless of user preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting can place additional load on servers. With this setting disabled, users who set their profile setting to not track read posts see faster load times of courses pages. With this setting enabled, that performance increase is lost, and all course views see the same performance as if the users personal setting was on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When disabled, any forums previously set to &amp;quot;Forced&amp;quot; (or &amp;quot;On&amp;quot; prior to Moodle 2.6) will be treated as optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mark post read after &#039;X&#039; days===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is forum_oldpostdays and specifies the number of days after which any post is considered to be read. E.g. If this is set to 14 days then any post older than 14 days will be considered read. If you set this to 0 then &#039;&#039;&#039;ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; posts are instantly considered to be read. If you don&#039;t want any posts to be considered read without the user reading them then set a high figure (e.g. 1000) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing the subject line of forum notifications===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
Normally when forum subscribers receive emails from forums, the subject line is of the form: Course short name + Subject of post:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forum1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The subject line can be changed - for example to: Course short name + Forum name + Subject by going to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Language&amp;gt;Language customisation&#039;&#039; and in forum.php changing the string &#039;&#039;postmailsubject&#039;&#039; to &lt;br /&gt;
 {$a-&amp;gt;courseshortname} {$a-&amp;gt;forumname} {$a-&amp;gt;subject}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forum2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/lTLdIiSxclU The Moodle Forum] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/amyQjAESkZM Moodle Forum Types and Group Mode] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Forum konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:フォーラムの追加/編集]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del foro]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Forum_activity&amp;diff=114151</id>
		<title>Forum activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Forum_activity&amp;diff=114151"/>
		<updated>2014-08-14T09:21:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video links&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
The forum module is an activity where students and teachers can exchange ideas by posting comments. There are four basic forum types. Forum posts can be graded by the teacher or other students. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Forumexample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A forum  can contribute significantly to successful communication and community building in an online environment. You can use forums for many innovative purposes in educational settings, but teaching forums and student forums are arguably the two more significant distinctions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Forum settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Forum FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/amyQjAESkZM Moodle Forum Types and Group Mode] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Módulo foro]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Foroak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[it:Modulo forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:フォーラムモジュール]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=114007</id>
		<title>Atto editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Atto_editor&amp;diff=114007"/>
		<updated>2014-08-06T08:12:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Editing text}}&lt;br /&gt;
The text editor (sometimes referred to as the &#039;HTML editor&#039; has many icons to assist the user in entering content.  Many of these icons and functions should be familiar to anyone who uses a word processor. Some examples of where you will see the text editor include: Editing Section headings, description of an activity, writing an answer to a quiz question or editing the content of many blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default text editor in Moodle is the Atto editor, built specifically for Moodle. There is also a version of the [[TinyMCE editor]] and a plain text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text editors can be enabled, disabled or a different one set to default from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Manage editors&#039;&#039;. The order of priority may also be specified here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An individual user can select an editor in their profile from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; My Profile settings &amp;gt; Edit profile.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Atto HTML editor==&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Atto1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1:Expand&lt;br /&gt;
| 2.Style&lt;br /&gt;
| 3.Bold&lt;br /&gt;
| 4.Italic&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5.Bulleted list&lt;br /&gt;
| 6.Numbered list&lt;br /&gt;
| 7.Add link&lt;br /&gt;
| 8.Unlink &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9.Add image&lt;br /&gt;
| 10.Add media&lt;br /&gt;
| 11.Manage embedded files&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Atto22.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Atto Row 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 1. Underline&lt;br /&gt;
| 2. Strikethrough&lt;br /&gt;
| 3. Subscript&lt;br /&gt;
| 4. Superscript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 5. Align left&lt;br /&gt;
| 6. Align centre&lt;br /&gt;
| 7. Align right&lt;br /&gt;
| 8. Increase indent &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9. Decrease indent&lt;br /&gt;
| 10. Equation editor&lt;br /&gt;
| 11. Special character&lt;br /&gt;
| 12. Table&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13. Clear formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| 14. Undo/redo&lt;br /&gt;
| 15. Undo/redo&lt;br /&gt;
| 16. Accessibility checker&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 17. Screenreader helper&lt;br /&gt;
| 18. HTML/code view&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Equation editor==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}If either the [[MathJax filter|MathJax]] or the [[TeX notation filter|TeX notation]] filters are enabled (in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;) then an equation editor button is provided in the toolbar for launching the equation editor.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:equation editor.png|thumb|Equation editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Toolbar settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can specify which plugins to display and in which order from &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Atto toolbar settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:atto-plugins.png|thumb|center|450px|Atto Plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra plugins from the list (for example &#039;Font color&#039; or &#039;Emoticon&#039;) may be added by typing the toolbarconfig term into the toolbar config table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:toolbarconfig.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here for example are the available colours when &#039;fontcolor&#039; is added:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fontcolor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The icons are displayed in related groups and the administrator can decide how many groups to display in the default collapsed state of the toolbar (that is, how many groups to display on Row 1).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Equation editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equation editor commands may be removed, added or reordered in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Atto HTML editor &amp;gt; Equation editor settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:equationeditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/GNQSK_fPV98 Moodle HQ screencast demonstrating Atto editor] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/ZoOAkpK9Oho The Moodle Text Editor - Atto] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Text editor FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Embedded files repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=258631 New 2.7 Equation Editor - Missing Key Items] forum discussion and associated issue MDL-45067&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text-Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Editor de texto]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/editorsettingsatto&amp;diff=113360</id>
		<title>admin/setting/editorsettingsatto</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/editorsettingsatto&amp;diff=113360"/>
		<updated>2014-07-01T01:47:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: adding images &amp;amp; category&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:atto-plugins.png|thumb|Atto Plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides the Administrator with a list of the Atto plugins installed on the site.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:attotoolbarconfig.png|thumb|Atto Toolbar Config]]&lt;br /&gt;
Some plugins allow configuration via the Settings link.&lt;br /&gt;
Administrators can also set the default icons for the toolbar for all users on the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Editing text]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:attotoolbarconfig.png&amp;diff=113359</id>
		<title>File:attotoolbarconfig.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:attotoolbarconfig.png&amp;diff=113359"/>
		<updated>2014-07-01T01:47:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Screenshot showing the config of the Atto icons for a site&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screenshot showing the config of the Atto icons for a site&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:atto-plugins.png&amp;diff=113358</id>
		<title>File:atto-plugins.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=File:atto-plugins.png&amp;diff=113358"/>
		<updated>2014-07-01T01:44:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Screenshot showing the Atto plugins&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screenshot showing the Atto plugins&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/editorsettingsatto&amp;diff=113357</id>
		<title>admin/setting/editorsettingsatto</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/editorsettingsatto&amp;diff=113357"/>
		<updated>2014-07-01T01:42:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page provides the Administrator with a list of the Atto plugins installed on the site.  Some plugins allow configuration via the Settings link.&lt;br /&gt;
Administrators can also set the default icons for the toolbar for all users on the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Editing text]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/editorsettingsatto&amp;diff=113356</id>
		<title>admin/setting/editorsettingsatto</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=admin/setting/editorsettingsatto&amp;diff=113356"/>
		<updated>2014-07-01T01:38:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: creating initial page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page provides the Administrator with a list of the Atto plugins installed on the site.  Some plugins allow configuration via the Settings link.&lt;br /&gt;
Administrators can also set the default icons for the toolbar for all users on the site.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Site_policies&amp;diff=112905</id>
		<title>Site policies</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Site_policies&amp;diff=112905"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:11:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Security}}&lt;br /&gt;
A site administrator can set site policies affecting the security and privacy of the site in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Protect usernames===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled, when a user attempts to reset their password and enters a username or email address, the following message is displayed: &amp;quot;If you supplied a correct username or email address then an email should have been sent to you.&amp;quot; This is to prevent a malicious party from using the interface to determine which usernames and email addresses are in use in valid accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the protect usernames setting is disabled, when a user attempts to reset their password they are provided with feedback regarding whether an account exists with the username or email address supplied. For example, the message &amp;quot;The email address was not found in the database&amp;quot; may be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force users to login===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you turn this setting on, all users must login before they even see the [[Front Page]] of the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force users to login for profiles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this set to Yes to keep anonymous visitors away from user profiles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force users to login to view user pictures===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled, users must login in order to view user profile pictures and the default user picture will be used in all notification emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open to Google===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this setting allows Google&#039;s search spiders guest access to your site. Any part of the site that allows guest access will then be searchable on Google. In addition, people coming in to your site via a Google search will automatically be logged in as a guest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Profile visible roles===&lt;br /&gt;
Any role which is checked/ticked here will be visible on  user profiles and the Participation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum uploaded file size===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the most frequently asked question in the Moodle.org Using Moodle forums is &amp;quot;How do I increase the upload file size limit?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upload file sizes are restricted in a number of ways - each one in this list restricts the following ones:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The Apache server setting LimitRequestBody ... default in Apache 2.x or greater is set to 0 or an unlimited upload size&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The PHP site settings post_max_size and upload_max_filesize in php.ini : &#039;&#039;&#039;modify php.ini in web server directories&#039;&#039;&#039; ( apache2.x.x/bin/php.ini ) not in php directories :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 post_max_size = 128M;  to increase limit to 128 Megabytes;&lt;br /&gt;
 upload_max_filesize = 128M;  to increase limit to 128 Megabytes;&lt;br /&gt;
 max_execution_time = 600 ; Maximum execution time of each script, in seconds;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The Moodle site-wide maximum uploaded file size setting: &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies &amp;gt; Maximum uploaded file size&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The Moodle course maximum uploaded file size setting in the course default  settings: &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course default settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. The  file size settings in each individual course in &#039;&#039;Course Administration&amp;gt;Settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Certain course activity module settings (for example, Assignment)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[File upload size]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User quota===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of bytes that a user can store in their own [[Private files]] area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow EMBED and OBJECT tags===&lt;br /&gt;
Allowing these presents a security risk but if you wish normal users such as students to be able to use them then check the box here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable trusted content===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default Moodle will always thoroughly clean text that comes from users to remove any possible bad scripts, media etc that could be a security risk. The Trusted Content system is a way of giving particular users that you trust the ability to include these advanced features in their content without interference. To enable this system, you need to first enable this setting, and then grant the [[Capabilities/moodle/site:trustcontent|Trust submitted content]] capability to a specific Moodle role. Texts created or uploaded by such users will be marked as trusted and will not be cleaned before display. Please refer to [[dev:Trusttext cleaning bypass]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum time to edit posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the editing time for forum postings. The editing time is the amount of time users have to change forum postings before they are mailed to subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please refer to the forum discussions [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=28679 Editing a forum post after the 30 minutes deadline] and [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=5367 The philosophy underlying &amp;quot;no editing after 30 minutes&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Full name format===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting has been moved in Moodle 2.6 onwards to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; [[Roles settings|User policies]]&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow extended characters in usernames===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default here, unchecked = unenabled, can only contain alphabetical letters in lowercase, numbers, hypen &#039;-&#039;, underscore &#039;_&#039;, period &#039;.&#039;, or at sign &#039;@&#039;. If you enable this, it will be possible to have any characters for the username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Site policy URL===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a site policy that all users must see and agree to before using this site, then specify the URL to it here, otherwise leave this field blank. The URL can point to any type of file anywhere online that can be accessed without a log in to your Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended that the site policy is on the same domain as Moodle to avoid the problem of Internet Explorer users seeing a blank screen when the site policy is on a different domain.&lt;br /&gt;
* The site policy will be displayed in a frame. You can view it via the URL &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;yourmoodlesite.org/user/policy.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Site policy URL for guests===&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to the Site policy URL as above but will be seen by those to whom you give guest access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Keep tag name casing===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, then tags like the following will be displayed: SOCCER, gUiTaR, MacDonalds, music&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If unchecked, then all tags will be displayed as follows: Soccer, Guitar, Macdonalds, Music&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tips&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
:* For English, off is useful.&lt;br /&gt;
:* For Japanese, no changes are made either way.&lt;br /&gt;
:* For languages where this kind of capitalization changes the meaning, it is best to keep this option on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Profiles for enrolled users only===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To prevent misuse by spammers, profile descriptions of users who are not yet enrolled in any course are hidden. New users must enrol in at least one course before they can add a profile description.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cron execution via command line only===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Cron]] is an action that runs various administrative jobs on your Moodle such as sending out forum posts. Normally Cron can be run by typing www.YOURMOODLE.com/admin/cron.php but as anyone logged in can do this, if you wish to prevent it, then check this box and only a admin can run Cron from the command line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cron password for remote access===&lt;br /&gt;
Setting a password here will mean that users can only run cron from the browser if they know the password and add it like this:&lt;br /&gt;
www.YOURMOODLE.com/admin/cron.php/?password=THEPASSWORDYOUSET&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Account lockout===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Account lockout may be enabled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Account lockout threshold: After a specified number of failed login attempts, a user&#039;s account is locked and they are sent an email containing a URL to unlock the account. Setting this to &#039;No&#039; means there is no threshold and an account attempting to log in can do so an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Account lockout observation window: Observation time for lockout threshold, if there are no failed attempts the threshold counter is reset after this time. This is the counter for how long to watch for more failed attempts by an account trying to log in even after being locked out, the counter will reset at each attempt and last this long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Account lockout duration: Locked out account is automatically unlocked after this duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The account may also be unlocked by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Accounts &amp;gt; Browse list of users&#039;&#039; or by waiting for the account lockout duration to elapse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password policy===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is highly recommended that a password policy is set to force users to use stronger passwords that are less susceptible to being cracked by a intruder.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Password policy.png|thumb|Password policy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password policy includes option to set the minimum length of the password, the minimum number of digits, the minimum number of lower-case characters, the minimum number of upper-case characters and the minimum number of non alphanumeric characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password policy is enabled by default. Default (recommended) settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Password length - 8&lt;br /&gt;
* Digits - 1&lt;br /&gt;
* Lowercase letters - 1&lt;br /&gt;
* Uppercase letters - 1&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-alphanumeric characters - 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user enters a password that does not meet the requirements, they are given an error message indicating the nature of the problem with the entered password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling the password policy does not affect existing users until they decide to or are required to change their password. An admin can force all users to change their password using the force password change option in [[Bulk user actions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip&#039;&#039;: The password policy may also be applied to [[Enrolment key|enrolment keys]] by ticking the &#039;Use password policy&#039; checkbox in the [[Self enrolment]] settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group enrolment key policy===&lt;br /&gt;
If this is enabled then when a teacher sets a group enrolment key, they will have to set a key which follows the password policy set above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Disable user profile images===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check/tick this box if you don&#039;t want your users to be able to change their [[User pictures|profile images]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email change confirmation===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A confirmation step is required for users to change their email address unless the &#039;&#039;emailchangeconfirmation&#039;&#039; box is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Remember username===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want  usernames to be stored during login then set this to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;. This will store permanent cookies and in some countries may be considered a privacy issue if used without consent. From a UK point of view, see http://tracker.moodle.org/secure/attachment/24290/UK+Laws+Relating+to+Cookies-LUNS2011.pdf See also the Using Moodle forum discussion [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=201558 EU Cookie Law].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Strict validation of required fields===&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled, users are prevented from entering a space or line break only in required fields in forms. (note: add more info)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/VZdv2FvxwrQ Moodle 2 Administration Security settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Políticas del sitio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Gunearen_politikak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Règles site]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:サイトポリシー]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Website-Rechte]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_RSS_feeds&amp;diff=112904</id>
		<title>Using RSS feeds</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Using_RSS_feeds&amp;diff=112904"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:06:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RSS feeds}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Activities and other areas that produce RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subscribing to RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To subscribe to an RSS feed from Moodle, go to the activity, click on the orange &#039;RSS&#039; button and copy the address from your browser bar to your RSS reader software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restricting access to RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure security and privacy, RSS feed URLs contain a special token that identifies the user they are for. This prevents users from accessing areas of Moodle they shouldn&#039;t have access to via RSS feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users have this token automatically created for them the first time they access an area of Moodle that produces an RSS feed. If a user feels that their RSS feed token has been compromised in some way they can request a new one by going to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; My profile &amp;gt; Security keys&#039;&#039; and clicking the Reset link next to the RSS key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To provide a public RSS feed for use on another site, login to your Moodle site as a guest, then copy the RSS feed address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Zx9o-ueJ-II Moodle 2.0 - RSS]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:RSS-Feeds nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Site-wide_reports&amp;diff=112903</id>
		<title>Site-wide reports</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Site-wide_reports&amp;diff=112903"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:03:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to reports available at both site and course level, the following site-wide reports are available for administrators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Config changes report]] - Shows changes made by an administrator to the site configuration&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course overview report]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Question instances report]] - Reports where particular question types are used on the site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/YJ5qxYfWmbY Moodle 2 Administration Reports]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Logs]] - Activity reports for course or site&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Reports FAQ]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course reports]] in Managing a Moodle course&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Plugins_overview| Plugins overview]] for checking the status of all plugins on the site.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:General report plugins|General report plugins]] developer documentation&lt;br /&gt;
*[[ad-hoc contributed reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Reportes del sitio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Systemweite Berichte]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=112902</id>
		<title>Quiz settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=112902"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:55:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a new quiz is a two-step process. In the first step, you create the quiz activity and set its options which specify the rules for interacting with the quiz. In the second step you add questions to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
This page describes the options you can set for the quiz activity. The page [[Building Quiz]] describes how to set up the questions for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz administration==&lt;br /&gt;
When you first set up your quiz from &#039;&#039;Add an activity or resource &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;, (or, if you don&#039;t have this link, the dropdown &#039;&#039;Add an activity&amp;gt;Quiz&#039;&#039;) you will get the following settings, (which can also be changed later in the Edit Settings link of the Quiz administration settings block) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Quizgeneral.png|thumb|448px|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
;Name&lt;br /&gt;
:This is the standard name field. This name will appear on the home page of the course, navigation menu and other places which will show or provide links to this quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Description&lt;br /&gt;
:Describe the purpose of the glossary and provide instructions or background information, links etc. Click the icon top left to expand the toolbars, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&#039;&#039;&#039;Display description on course page&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:If ticked, the quiz description will appear on the course page directly under the quiz name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Timing==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quiztiming.png|thumb|452px|Timing settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Open the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:You can specify times when the quiz is accessible for people to make attempts. Before the opening time the quiz will be unavailable to students. They will be able to view the quiz introduction but will not be able to view the questions. Quizzes with start times in the future diasplay both the open and close date for students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can make the quiz available at different times for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Close the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:After the closing time, the students will not be able to start new attempts. Answers that the student submits after the quiz closing date will be saved but they will not be marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: Even after the quiz has closed students will still be able to see the quiz description and review their attempts. What exactly they will see depends on the settings you choose for review options (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
;Time limit&lt;br /&gt;
:By default, quizzes do not have a time limit, which allows students as much time as they need to complete the quiz. If you do specify a time limit, several things are done to try and ensure that quizzes are completed within that time:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quiz timer.png|thumb|Navigation block showing quiz timer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A countdown timer is shown in the quiz navigation block &lt;br /&gt;
# When the timer has run out, the quiz is submitted automatically with whatever answers have been filled in so far &lt;br /&gt;
# If a student manages to cheat and goes over the allotted time, no marks are awarded for any answers entered after the time ran out&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can make the quiz available last a different period of time for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;When time expires..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options as to what will happen when the time limit is up. Choose the one you need from the dropdown menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;there is a grace period...&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then you can check the box to enable the &amp;quot;Submission grace period&amp;quot; and specify a period of time during which learners may still submit the quiz after the time is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples of how timing is handled===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#A student starts a quiz at noon. The quiz has a one-hour time-limit, and a 1 hour delay between attempts. The student gets distracted, and so actually does not submit (using the overdue handling) until 1:30pm. &#039;&#039;They are allowed to start their second attempt at 2. pm&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The quiz count-down timer submits a student&#039;s quiz attempt at the last second when time expires. Because the server is heavily loaded, it takes 30 seconds to process the student&#039;s attempt. &#039;&#039;The submission is accepted nonetheless.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Same situation as above but with a 120 second delay: &#039;&#039;The submission is rejected.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The delay is not because of server load but because the student found a way to cheat the timer. &#039;&#039;Moodle cannot know what causes a delay.The behaviour is controlled by the admin setting(quiz | graceperiodmin), 60 seconds by default.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#A student is a member of 3 groups,all of which have different override settings. Which limits will apply to this student? &#039;&#039;If there is any user-specific override, then that is used, and the group overrides for that setting are not used at all. Otherwise, if there are multiple group overrides, the most generous values are used (the earliest open date, the latest close date, the longest time limit, the most number of attempts, and the student can type any of the passwords).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizgrade.png|thumb|312px|Grade settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Grade category&lt;br /&gt;
If you have categories in your gradebook, select the one you wish the quiz to be in here.&lt;br /&gt;
;Attempts allowed&lt;br /&gt;
:Students may be allowed to have multiple attempts at a quiz. This can help make the process of taking the quiz more of an educational activity rather than simply an assessment. If the quiz is randomized then the student will get a new version for each attempt. This is useful for practice purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can change the allowed number of attempts for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Grading method&lt;br /&gt;
:When multiple attempts are allowed, there are different ways you can use the grades to calculate the student&#039;s final grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
* Highest grade - the final grade is the highest (best) grade in any attempt&lt;br /&gt;
* Average grade - the final grade is the average (simple mean) grade of all attempts&lt;br /&gt;
* First grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the first attempt (other attempts are ignored)&lt;br /&gt;
* Last grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the most recent attempt only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Layout==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizlayout.png|thumb|422px|Layout settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Question order&lt;br /&gt;
:If &#039;Shuffled randomly&#039; is selected, then the order of questions in the quiz will be randomly shuffled each time a student starts a new attempt at the quiz. The intention is to make it a little harder for students to copy from each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;New page&lt;br /&gt;
:For longer quizzes it makes sense to stretch the quiz over several pages by limiting the number of questions per page. When adding questions to the quiz, page breaks will automatically be inserted according to the setting you choose here. However, you will also be able to move page breaks around by hand later on the editing page.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Note that changing this setting has no effect on questions you have already added to the quiz&#039;&#039;&#039;. The setting will only apply to questions you add subsequently. To change the page breaks in an existing quiz, you need to go to the quiz editing screen, tick the &#039;Show page breaks&#039; checkbox, then use the repaginate control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Navigation method (available by clicking &#039;&#039;Show More&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By choosing &#039;&#039;Sequential&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;Free&#039;&#039;, the teacher is forcing the student to progress through the questions in order without being able to go back to a previous question or skip to a later one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question behaviour==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizquestionbehaviour.png|thumb|447px|Question behaviour settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
;Shuffle within questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If set to &#039;yes&#039;, then each time the student takes a quiz the parts of the question will be shuffled randomly.&lt;br /&gt;
;How questions behave&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Deferred feedback&#039;&#039;&#039; - Students must enter an answer to each question and then submit the entire quiz, before anything is graded or they get any feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Adaptive mode and Adaptive mode (no penalties)&#039;&#039;&#039; - Allows students to have multiple attempts at the question before moving on to the next question. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Interactive mode&#039;&#039;&#039; - After submitting one answer, and reading the feedback, the student has to click a &#039;Try again&#039; button before they can try a new response. Once the student has got the question right, they can no longer change their response. Once the student has got the question wrong too many times, they are just graded wrong (or partially correct) and get shown the feedback and can no longer change their answer. &lt;br /&gt;
**There can be different feedback after each try the student makes. &lt;br /&gt;
**The question can adapt itself to the student&#039;s answer, for example by giving some hints before asking the student to try again.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Immediate feedback&#039;&#039;&#039; - Similar to interactive mode in that the student can submit their response immediately during the quiz attempt, and get it graded. However, they can only submit one response, they cannot change it later. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Deferred feedback or Immediate feedback&#039;&#039;&#039; with &#039;&#039;&#039;Certainty-based marking&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;CBM&#039;&#039;&#039;) - With CBM, the student does not only answer the question, but they also indicate how sure they are they got the question right. The grading is adjusted by the choice of certainty, so that students have to reflect honestly on their own level of knowledge in order to get the best mark.  See the &#039;&#039;See Also&#039;&#039; section below for an example quiz using CBM and a blog post explaining the philosophy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; There is also an option &amp;quot;Manual grading&amp;quot; which can be enabled from A&#039;&#039;dministration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Question behaviour&#039;&#039; This causes all questions in the quiz to require manual grading.&lt;br /&gt;
===Certainty-based marking===&lt;br /&gt;
When a student answers a question they also have to state how sure they are of the answer: not very (less than 67%); fairly (more than 67%) or very (more than 80%). Their grading is then ajusted according to how certain they are, which means that for example if they answered correctly but were only guessing, their mark is adjusted from 1 to 0.33. If they answered wrongly but were very sure, their mark is adjusted from 0 to -2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;For detailed information on how CBM works and how students can benefit from it, see [[Using certainty-based marking]].&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm03.png|thumb|correct answer; very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm05.png|thumb|correct answer; fairly sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cmb04.png|thumb|correct answer; not very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm01.png|thumb|wrong answer; very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm99.png|thumb|wrong answer; not very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Each attempt builds on the last (available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple attempts are allowed and this setting is set to Yes, then each new attempt contains the results of the previous attempt. This allows the student on the new attempt to concentrate on just those questions that were answered incorrectly on the previous attempt. If this option is chosen then each attempt by a particular student uses the same questions in the same order, independent of randomization settings. To show a fresh quiz on every attempt, select No for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(See also the forum discussion: [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=225920 CBM too harsh?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Review options==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizreview.png|thumb|600px|Review options expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section controls what information students will be shown when they review their past attempts at the quiz, and during the attempt in adaptive mode.  It is a matrix with check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The various pieces of information that can be controlled are:&lt;br /&gt;
; The attempt: Will show how the student responded to each question.&lt;br /&gt;
; Whether correct: Displays whether the students response to each question is correct or incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
; Marks:  Reveals the marks awarded to the student and the grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
; Specific feedback: Will show the feedback for the response to the answer as set when adding the question to the quiz. Each response to a question can have feedback for both correct and incorrect answers.&lt;br /&gt;
; General feedback: Displays the general feedback for the whole question as set when adding the question to the quiz. You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. &lt;br /&gt;
; Right answer:  Reveals the correct answer to each question, whether the student answered correctly or not (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
; Overall feedback: Displays feedback for the entire quiz as set in the quiz settings (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each of the above items, you can determine the timeframe when the students will see them:&lt;br /&gt;
; During the attempt : is only available when &#039;&#039;‘How questions behave’&#039;&#039; has been set to &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback’&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback with CBM’&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;‘Interactive with multiple tries’&#039;&#039;. If set to one of these options then a &#039;&#039;‘Check’&#039;&#039; button will appear below the answer and when clicked the student will submit that response and then receive immediate feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
; Immediately after the attempt : means within 2 minutes of the student clicking &amp;quot;submit all and finish&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
; Later, while the quiz is still open : means after 2 minutes, but before the close date (if the quiz does not have a close date, this phase never ends).&lt;br /&gt;
; After the quiz is closed : means what it says (you never get here for quizzes without a close date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Checking any of the boxes in the timeframe row, will reveal the test to the student. For example, to allow students to see their quiz immediately after taking it but not later, make sure none of the boxes in &amp;quot;Later&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;After&amp;quot; rows are checked.  The student will be able to see their grade but not get into the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Currently, the Answers display is a bit inconsistent between different question types. For example, the matching question type shows students which of their responses are correct, but does not tell them the right answer for the ones they got wrong. The short answer and multiple choices question types do tell the student what the correct answer is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the capability &#039;View hidden grades&#039; [[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewhidden|moodle/grade:viewhidden]] (typically teachers and administrators) are not affected by these settings and will always by able to review all information about a student&#039;s attempt at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your list of review options, you must have &#039;The attempt&#039; (the first option in the lists) selected  before you can enable the options to show &#039;Whether correct&#039;, &#039;Specific feedback&#039;, &#039;General feedback&#039;, and &#039;Right answer&#039;. If you choose not to let the students review the attempt, your only options are to display &#039;Marks&#039; and &#039;Overall feedback&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizappearance.png|thumb|470px|Display settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Show the user&#039;s picture&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible, when displaying the user&#039;s profile picture for proctoring purposes, to choose whether a large image or thumbnail will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Decimal places in grades&lt;br /&gt;
:This option determines how many digits will be shown after the decimal separator (see  [[dev:Translation_langconfig|langconfig]] ) when the grade is displayed. A setting of 0 for example means that the grades are displayed as integers. This setting is only used for the display of grades, not for the display or marking of answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Extra restrictions on attempts==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default and are available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizextrarestrictions.png|thumb|470px|Extra restrictions settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Require password&lt;br /&gt;
:This field is optional. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If you specify a password in here then participants must enter the same password before they are allowed to make an attempt on the quiz. This is useful to give only a selected group of students access to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Require network address&lt;br /&gt;
:This field is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:You can restrict access for a quiz to particular subnets on the LAN or Internet by specifying a comma-separated list of partial or full IP address numbers. This is especially useful for a proctored (invigilated) quiz, where you want to be sure that only people in a certain room are able to access the quiz. For example: 192.168. , 231.54.211.0/20, 231.3.56.211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There are three types of numbers you can use (you can not use text based domain names like example.com): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Full IP addresses, such as 192.168.10.1 which will match a single computer (or proxy). &lt;br /&gt;
# Partial addresses, such as 192.168 which will match anything starting with those numbers. &lt;br /&gt;
# CIDR notation, such as 231.54.211.0/20 which allows you to specify more detailed subnets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Spaces are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Enforced delay between attempts&lt;br /&gt;
:These two  fields are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:You can set a time (from seconds to weeks) between the first and second attempt of a quiz. You can also (or alternatively) set a time from seconds to weeks for subsequent attempts after the second attempt. Thus, you might allow a student to take the quiz twice immediately with no delay, but if they want to improve their score with a third attempt, they are forced to wait a week and use the time for extra revision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Browser security&lt;br /&gt;
:This is by default an advanced field, visible by clicking &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:The options in this section offer various ways to try to restrict how students may try to &#039;cheat&#039; while attempting a quiz. However, this is not a simple issue, and what in one situation is considered &#039;cheating&#039; may, in another situation, just be effective use of information technology. (For example, the ability to quickly find answers using a search engine.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Note also that this is not just at problem of technology with a technical solution. Cheating has been going on since long before computers, and while computers make certain actions, like copy and paste, easier, they also make it easier for teachers to detect cheating - for example using the quiz reports. The options provided here are not fool-proof, and while they do make some forms of cheating harder for students, they also make it more inconvenient for students to attempt the quizzes, and they are not fool-proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Full screen pop-up with some JavaScript security&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There is a limit to what the quiz, which runs on a web server, can do to restrict what the student sitting at their computer can do while attempting the quiz. However, this option does what is possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz will only start if the student has a JavaScript-enabled web-browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz appears in a fullscreen popup window that covers all the other windows and has no  course navigation controls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:seb24.png|thumb|465px|Student view of quiz question with full screen popup. (Click to see enlarged)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
:* The students are prevented, as far as is possible, from using facilities like copy and paste.&lt;br /&gt;
:* This setting does not work well with the MyMobile theme for mobile devices included in the standard installation.  In particular, quiz time limits do not function correctly (MDL-32047).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Require the use of Safe Exam Browser&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:This option will only appear if your administrator has enabled it in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safe exam browser|Safe Exam Browser]] is a customised web browser that must be downloaded and installed on the computer that the student uses to attempt the quiz. It restricts student use more effectively than a pop up window option.  Features include full screen, without web navigation options, shortcut keys including copy and paste are disabled and of course surfing the web during an exam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall feedback==&lt;br /&gt;
(These setttings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizoverallfeedback.png|thumb|448px|Overall feedback settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Overall feedback is shown to a student after they have completed an attempt at the quiz. The text that is shown can depend on the grade the student got. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 100%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 40%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then students who score between 100% and 40% will see the &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot; message, and those who score between 39.99% and 0% will see &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;. That is, the grade boundaries define ranges of grades, and each feedback string is displayed to scores within the appropriate range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grade boundaries can be specified either as a percentage, for example &amp;quot;31.41%&amp;quot;, or as a number, for example &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;. If your quiz is out of 10 marks, a grade boundary of 7 means 7/10 or better. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the maximum and minimum grade boundaries (100% and 0%) are set automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set as many or as few grade boundaries as you wish. The form allows you up to 5 ranges at first, but you can add more by clicking the &amp;quot;Add 3 fields to form&amp;quot; button underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re getting confusing error messages about a boundary being out of sequence (when it&#039;s obviously *in* sequence), or &amp;quot;boundaries must be between 0% and 100%&amp;quot; (and they are) -- check that the Maximum Grade for this quiz is set to something greater than zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group and User overrides==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:overridesquiz.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates, timing and number of allowed attempts may be changed for individual users or groups by following the links &#039;&#039;Group Overrides&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;User Overrides&#039;&#039; in the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular group, click the &amp;quot;add group override&amp;quot; button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;Group overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular user or users, click the &amp;quot;add user override&amp;quot;button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;Group overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:groupuseroverride.png|groupuseroverride.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Autosave period&lt;br /&gt;
:If enabled, student responses will be saved every minute/two minutes/five minutes (according to selection) This is useful so that students don&#039;t lose work but does increase the load on the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How questions behave can be configured in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Question behaviours&amp;gt;Manage question &lt;br /&gt;
behaviours&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/MCLGZTpfG60 Moodle 2.x Quiz]  MoodleBites video on YouTube   &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/mod/quiz/view.php?id=1496  School demo example of a quiz with CBM]  Log into with username &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; and password &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=225920 Forum thread: Certainty based marking - too harsh?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://helderenwijzer.nl/2011/10/certainty-based-marking-in-moodle/ Blog post on CBM (Certainty Based Marking)in Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Question_bank&amp;diff=112901</id>
		<title>Question bank</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Question_bank&amp;diff=112901"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:51:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows a teacher to create, preview, and edit questions in a database of question categories. The categories can be limited to being used on the site, course or quiz level.  The questions in a category can be added to a [[Quiz module|Quiz]] or to a [[Lesson module|lesson activity]] via an export process. The teacher enters the question bank by creating or editing a quiz activity or via &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Question bank&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select a category==&lt;br /&gt;
Questions are organised into categories. Initially each course has only one category called &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot;. It is good practice to create more categories to organize your questions. This not only makes it easier to find questions, but makes the use of random questions and matching question easier. You can create a hierarchy of categories because you can create subcategories inside parent categories. To add or edit categories click on the &amp;quot;[[Question categories|Categories]]&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The question editing screen shows the questions from the currently selected category. You choose this category from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu. Using the tick box below that menu you determine whether to also show the questions from all subcategories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Categories are shared in contexts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are separate question category trees in each different &#039;context&#039; in which questions are shared. The contexts available to you depend on whether you access the question bank from an activity or from a course and depend on the permissions assigned you for access to questions. See [[Question contexts]] for more information on these contexts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add a new question==&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;Questions&#039;&#039; tab to access the Question Bank page, if not there already.&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu, select a category you want to add a question to.&lt;br /&gt;
# The page will change to show the questions already in that category&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the question type you want to create from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new question&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill in the form for the question type you are creating. Each [[Question types|question type]] has its own form and has its own options.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;Save Changes&#039;&#039; at the bottom of the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit, duplicate, preview, delete and move==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:questionicons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each question in the question bank has four icons which allow you to edit, quickly duplicate, preview and delete the question. (The question may not be deleted if it is already in use elsewhere.) To move a question into a different category or subcategory, click into the box on its left; scroll down to &amp;quot;With Selected...&amp;quot; and choose &amp;quot;Move to..&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
*Put the answer into the question name so you can quickly see the answers when students are asking for answers. This is especially useful if you&#039;re dealing with large sets of questions! (No option yet for viewing category or answer of question in the list of questions.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Export questions in GIFT or Moodle XML formats, then import them into a Lesson. (Future versions of Moodle will make Question bank available to both Lesson and Quiz activities.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Remember that while some of the same question types can be found in both the Quiz and Lesson modules, they can be very different.  Scoring and grading each student&#039;s choice is more robust in a Quiz.  On the other hand, each Lesson question answer also has a [[Jumps|jump]] associated it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use GIFT or other export modes to print questions and answers in a category.  Hint, clever use of word processor macros, using search and replace, can tidy up a GIFT file for printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*The question title is useful in sorting and making notes. For example, &amp;quot;ZZ remove 2010-3 Why did the Moodler cross&amp;quot;, will put this question at the bottom of the list.  Or where you want a &#039;the&#039; questions in a category to appear in a specific order, use letters or numbers, knowing that AA will come first, AB will be second in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do a copy and paste from a PDF file into the question content area.  Reduces &amp;quot;other&amp;quot; hidden code which Word, Open Office and other programs can insert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sharing and Managing Question banks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be default, teachers can manage only the questions in the context of the courses they are in. You can set up a role to allow teachers to share and manager questions on a larger scale. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use this role to create a special system-wide &amp;quot;Question bank Manager&amp;quot; instead of giving admin level or site-wide Manager access to a person managing the Questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[How to let teachers share questions between courses]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/YQEx0PxRb4c Creating Quiz Questions (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/FGIh-5CYwzs Creating Quiz Questions (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/BRDbe7JcCBw Creating Quiz Questions (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragensammlung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Banco de Preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdera-bankua]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題バンク]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_activity&amp;diff=112900</id>
		<title>Quiz activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Quiz_activity&amp;diff=112900"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:50:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039; activity module allows the teacher to design and build quizzes consisting of a large variety of [[Question types]], including multiple choice, true-false, and short answer questions. These questions are kept in the [[Question bank]] and can be re-used in different quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Quizexample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Quizzes can be [[Quiz settings|configured]] to allow multiple attempts. Each attempt at a question is automatically marked, and the teacher can choose whether to give feedback and/or show the correct answers. &lt;br /&gt;
There are many ways to [[Using Quiz|use a quiz]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback about performance and self-assessment are important parts of a learning environment. There are several ways to give feedback to students: on each question or overall. The quiz module can display feedback and scores at different times during the quiz, using the review options in the [[Quiz settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A wide variety of [[Quiz reports]] (in addition to [[Grades]]) are available for use by the teacher. Quiz reports not only can focus on a single student&#039;s attempt to answer each question, but also can perform a robust item analysis of a question&#039;s validity based upon aggregated student responses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A single quiz can automatically select random and/or specific questions from different [[Question bank|categories]] of questions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are different options for [[Editing a quiz|scoring (marks-grades)]] individual questions in a specific quiz, [[Adding/updating_a_quiz#Grades_section|grading attempts]] for a quiz and each [[Question types|question type]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The quiz settings allow different [[Adding/updating_a_quiz#Display_section|display methods]]. They can randomize the questions for each student and or randomize the answers for each student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher can determine the number of questions on each page of questions the student sees.  The teacher can change the position of any question in the quiz. It is possible to put a label with information any place between questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher can [[Quiz settings|choose]] how questions behave during the quiz. It can be like a classic test, where the student gets no feedback while attempting the test, only later. Alternatively, Moodle can reveal the grades and/or feedback to the student during the quiz, and perhaps even give them another chance to answer the question (for fewer marks) having read the feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about list only mentions a few features of the quiz module and how it works with the question bank. Please follow the links on this page to learn more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sfGlV5WaZE8 Quiz in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/Word_table_format Microsoft Word table format add-on]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/YQEx0PxRb4c Creating Quiz Questions (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/FGIh-5CYwzs Creating Quiz Questions (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/BRDbe7JcCBw Creating Quiz Questions (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Módulo de examen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdetegiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:小テストモジュール]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:Тест]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Quizy]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:測驗卷]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Building_Quiz&amp;diff=112899</id>
		<title>Building Quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/310/en/index.php?title=Building_Quiz&amp;diff=112899"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:50:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How a Moodle quiz works==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word “quiz” might  conjure up for some images of TV game shows, but a Moodle quiz is basically a set of questions presented to the learner which may be automatically marked by Moodle or graded later by the teacher. The questions may be in sentence or number  form or contain various media such as video or sound. They do not all need to be the same type of questions: a quiz may contain multiple choice, matching, essays (teacher-graded) and calculated. Feedback may be given at any or all stages of the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a quiz is made, that’s not the end of it. A Moodle quiz is environmentally friendly: its questions are saved in a [[Question bank]] and may be recycled for use elsewhere. Thus, Mr Brown  could create a Physics Quiz with 20 questions for his class, Class Brown, and his colleague Mr Smith sharing the course could save himself valuable time by resusing 5 of Mr Brown’s questions in his own General Science quiz for Class Smith. (See also [[How to let teachers share questions between courses|Question Sharer role]] for sharing questions across the site)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you think of a quiz as  a book, the [[Quiz settings]] are equivalent to the front cover; the quiz itself is contained within when the questions are created. (Be careful : once you have chosen the Quiz Settings, it will be “live” on your course page, unless  you hide it, so your learners could potentially see a quiz with no questions, like a front cover with no content.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that it is possible to create questions directly in the [[Question bank]] without first creating a quiz. These questions may then be used later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a quiz has been added to the course and the [[Quiz settings]] established,the teacher can start to build the quiz.  The teacher can access the quiz to edit the questions by clicking directly on the Quiz name on the course home page or by clicking &amp;quot;Edit quiz&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:editquiz.png|thumb|400px|Accessing the quiz to add or edit questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have accessed the quiz editing screen as above, you can add questions from a number of locations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Add question&amp;quot; button to begin a new question (1 below)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;quot;Show&amp;quot; (2) to reveal the contents of the question bank (3) and then choose a pre-made question or click &amp;quot;Create new question&amp;quot; (4)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click (5)&amp;quot;Add a random question&amp;quot; to add a random question,  &#039;&#039;providing there are questions in the question bank already&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:add question.png|thumb|450px|Adding a question]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating a new question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To make a brand new question, click &amp;quot;Add a question&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. From the next screen, choose the question type you want to add and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039;  &#039;&#039;When you click on a question type on the left, helpful information appears on the right&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:questionpicker.png|thumb|440px|Selecting a question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Fill in the question form, making sure to give a grade to the correct answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Click &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:questionadded.png|thumb|430px|A question when it has been created]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you have a very complex question, and you want to check it as you go along, you can preview it and then click &amp;quot;Save changes and continue editing&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:savechangesandcontinuediting.png|thumb|398px|Save changes and continue editing]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding responses and feedback====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you add responses and feedback you can display one or more toolbars in the editor:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:quizform1.png|thumb|350px|With one toolbar]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:quizform2.png|thumb|350px|With three toolbars]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that when a question has been created, an icon and words display its type (eg multiple choice) and a magnifiying glass icon allows you to preview it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can continue adding questions this way, clicking the &amp;quot;Add a question&amp;quot; button each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing a pre-made question===&lt;br /&gt;
If other teachers in the course have made questions, or if a teacher made questions in an earlier quiz, these can be added to the current quiz by clicking the arrows next to them in the question bank (1 below) or by checking/ticking the box of several and then clicking the button &amp;quot;add to quiz&amp;quot; (2). To ensure all previously made questions are available, make sure to tick the boxes &amp;quot;also show questions from sub-categories/old questions&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:premadequestion.png|thumb|350px|Using a previously made question]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a random question===&lt;br /&gt;
As long as you have questions in the question bank, you can add random questions to your quiz (3 above). This might be useful if you have students in a class taking a quiz at the same time, because they are unlikely to get the same questions at the same time. The same question will never appear twice in a quiz. If you include several random questions then different questions will always be chosen for each of them. If you mix random questions with non-random questions then the random questions will be chosen so that they do not duplicate one of the non-random questions. This does imply that you need to provide enough questions in the category from which the random questions are chosen, otherwise the student will be shown a friendly error message. The more questions you provide the more likely it will be that students get different questions on each attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grade for the randomly chosen question will be rescaled so that the maximum grade is what you have chosen as the grade for the random question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add one or more random questions by choosing the number and category in the question bank. Note the die icon to highlight random question selection.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:randomquestions.png|thumb|Adding a random question]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:randomquestionadded.png|thumb|Random question selected for quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Quiz question tags====&lt;br /&gt;
Note that although it is possible to tag questions, the feature does not currently work. See forum discussion: https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=194119&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question categories===&lt;br /&gt;
Questions can be stored and retrieved from categories in the Question bank. When you make a new question it defaults to the category with the course name. So if you make a quiz in the Senior Physics course, questions will automatically be added to &amp;quot;Default for Senior Physics&amp;quot;. You can opt to have your quiz questions in a category of their own (&amp;quot;Quizname&amp;quot;) or to add a subcategory.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To add a subcategory, go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Question bank&amp;gt;Categories&#039;&#039; For more information on question contexts and categories, see [[Question bank]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will have access to different categories according to their permissions. For example, a regular teacher might only have access to question categories in his own Physics course whereas his Faculty Head of Science with permissions in all science courses might have access to question categories in Biology and Chemistry as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz layout==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can choose in  &#039;&#039; Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Edit settings&amp;gt;Layout&#039;&#039; whether to have a new page for every question or after a certain number of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can click the &amp;quot;Add a page here&amp;quot; button to add a page at selected intervals and move questions up and down by clicking the arrow button.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also set the pages by clicking the tab &amp;quot;Order and paging&amp;quot; on the Edit quiz screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*Questions may be moved up and down with the arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
*Or you can enter numbers in the boxes (e.g. change 10, 20, 30, 40 to 30, 40, 20, 10) then click &amp;quot;reorder questions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can check a box to select a question and then click &amp;quot;Add new pages after selected questions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can &amp;quot;repaginate&amp;quot; by setting the number of questions per page.  After setting the number of questions per page, you can move questions so that there are a different number of questions on each page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:paging1.png|thumb|Moving questions and adding pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:orderandpaging.png|thumb|Order and paging]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:repaginate.png|thumb|Repaginating]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning points to questions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Quiz administration &amp;gt; Edit quiz &amp;gt; Editing quiz&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set how many points each question is worth by changing the number in the box to the right of each question (1) and you can change the maximum grade by changing the number in the box at the top of the quiz (2) The default is one point per question and 100.00 maximum grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:gradingquiz.png|thumb|450px|Points per question and max grade]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
:Tip: Each save button is independent of each other.   Thus if you change 2 grade boxes and click on the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, only the grade next to that button will be saved.  Your other changes will revert to what they were before.  Best practice is to change the grade and save one question at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz module will do any maths, so for example, a 2 point question will be  worth 2 times more when the Quiz module determines how many point out of 10 to award the student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Previewing the quiz==&lt;br /&gt;
*You can preview individual questions by clicking the magnifying glass icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can preview the whole quiz by clicking the &amp;quot;Preview&amp;quot; link in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Preview&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*The quiz works like a real quiz so you can see your grades and any feedback for correct/incorrect answers just as a student would see them.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:previewquestion.png|thumb|200px|Previewing a single question]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:previewquiz.png|thumb|200px|Click to preview the whole quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:quizpreviewed.png|thumb|200px|Quiz in preview mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==After quiz has been attempted==&lt;br /&gt;
If one or more students have taken the quiz, you will see a list of all the questions in the quiz and a notice saying that you cannot add or remove questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the order of questions, regrade them, preview an individual question and click on an question edit link that will allow you to directly edit the question stored in the question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can delete all quiz attempts by students and then edit the quiz as if no students had attempted it.  To do this,click the quiz name and then the Results link in the Navigation  block.  This will present a list of students and their scores.  Click &amp;quot;Select all&amp;quot; and then &amp;quot;Delete selected attempts&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dealing with faulty questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to deal with &amp;quot;bad&amp;quot; questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
::*Change the grade for the bad question to 0 in the quiz.  &lt;br /&gt;
::*Edit the question, changing what you will accept as a correct answer, then regrading the exam.  Remember when changing a question that the next time it is used it will be as it was in the last edit.  Also, regrading will only affect one quiz at a time.    &lt;br /&gt;
::*You can edit the question to explain the situation to the student and then you can set the grade for the question to zero. After you make such changes you should regrade the quiz by clicking on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Results&#039;&#039;&#039; tab and then the &#039;&#039;&#039;Regrade&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.  This will change the grade for all students who have taken the quiz so far.  Remember, if the question is used by another quiz, your &amp;quot;explanation&amp;quot; will appear as part of that quiz. &lt;br /&gt;
::*You can change the grade for the bad question and then move or delete the question from your question category.  The question will still appear on the quiz. Some places do not like to delete any question, but will move them to a &amp;quot;dead&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;bad&amp;quot; question category. &lt;br /&gt;
::*When you discover a bad question in your quiz, it may affect the question bank. Remember that a final might be made up of a certain number of random questions drawn from different question categories, the same categories used in a smaller subject quiz. It can be very important do something about bad or invalid questions in a question category when the categories are use in other places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Questions]] in [[Managing a Moodle course]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/YQEx0PxRb4c Creating Quiz Questions (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/FGIh-5CYwzs Creating Quiz Questions (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/BRDbe7JcCBw Creating Quiz Questions (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test erstellen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Construyendo un examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>